Projector
PX750U
User’s Manual
Model No.
NP-PX750U, NP-PX750UG
• Theprojector’sModelNo.indicatedontheprojector’slabelisNP-
PX750UandNP-PX750UGrespectively.
Allthemodelsarereferred to as PX750U throughout the user’s
manualexceptthespecicationpages.
1stedition,June2011
• DLPandBrilliantColoraretrademarksofTexasInstruments.
• Macintosh,MacOSXandPowerBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.
• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista,InternetExplorer,.NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeitheraregistered
trademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.
• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.
• Adobe,AdobePDF,AdobeReader,andAcrobatareeitherregisteredtrademarksortrademarksofAdobeSystems
IncorporatedintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.
• IDTandHQVaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofIntegratedDeviceTechnology,Inc.
• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.
• HDMI,theHDMILogoandHigh-DenitionMultimediaInterfacearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMI
LicensingLLC.
• DisplayPort,DisplayPortCertiedLogo,VESA,andVESAlogoaretrademarksoftheVideoElectronicsStandards
Association,registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.
• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandother
countriesandareas.
• Wi-Fi
®
,Wi-FiAlliance
®
,andWi-FiProtectedAccess(WPA,WPA2)
®
areregisteredtrademarksoftheWi-FiAlli-
ance.
• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation
• Crestron,CrestronControl,andCrestronRoomViewaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectron-
ics,Inc.
• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarks
oftheirrespectiveholders.
NOTES
(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.
(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionable
points,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.
(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprotorothermattersdeemed
toresultfromusingtheProjector.
i
Important Information
Safety Cautions
Precautions
PleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.
CAUTION
Toturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.
Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasily
accessible.
CAUTION
TOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.
THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.
REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.
Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufcienttocauseelectrical
shock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.
Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthis
unithasbeenprovided.
Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.
WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.
DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGS
CANBEFULLYINSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
ThisClassB digitalapparatusmeetsallrequirementsof theCanadianInterference-CausingEquipment Regula-
tions.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,
Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.
Disposing of your used product
EU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicprod-
uctscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisincludes
projectorsandtheirelectricalaccessoriesorlamps.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowthe
guidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.
Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpus
reducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpactsuchasmercurycontainedinalamptothehumanhealth
andtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.
ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMember
States.
WARNING
• Whentheprojectorisdamaged,coolinguidsmaycomeoutofinternalpart.
Shouldthishappen,immediatelyturnofftheACsupplytotheprojectorandcontactyourdealer.
DONOTtouchanddrinkthecoolinguid.Whenthecoolinguidsareswallowedorcontactedwithyour
eyes,pleaseconsultmedicalattentionimmediately.Ifyoutouchthecoolinguidwithyourhand,rinse
yourhandswellunderrunningwater.
ii
Important Information
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCalifornia
tocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
TheFederalCommunicationsCommissiondoesnotallowanymodicationsorchangestotheunitEXCEPTthose
speciedbyNECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.inthismanual.Failuretocomplywiththisgovernmentregu-
lationcouldvoidyourrighttooperatethisequipment.Thisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywith
thelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovide
reasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,and
canradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,maycause
harmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurina
particularinstallation.
Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedby
turningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthe
followingmeasures:
• Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.
• Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.
• Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.
• Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TV
technicianforhelp.
ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(veAmps)fuseinstalledforusewith
thisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.
Important Safeguards
Thesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventreandshock.Pleasereadthem
carefullyandheedallwarnings.
Installation
• Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:
- onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.
- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.
- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.
- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.
- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.
• Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:
- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.
- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk
ofbodilyinjury.
- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance
withanylocalbuildingcodes.
- Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.
iii
Important Information
WARNING
• Donotcoverthelenswiththelenscaporequivalentwhiletheprojectorison.Doingsocanleadtomeltingof
thecapduetotheheatemittedfromthelightoutput.
• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldlead
totheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.
Donottilttheprojectorforwardorbackatagreateranglethan10°.Doingsomayresultinmalfunction.Whenmount-
ingtheprojectorontheceiling,selectanappropriateoptionfor[FANMODE].
Fire and Shock Precautions
• Ensurethatthereissufcientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyour
projector.Allowminimumspacesbetweenyourprojectorandawall.(→pagevandvi)
• Donottrytotouchtheventilationoutletontherearsideofthecabinetasitcanbecomeheatedwhiletheprojectoris
turnedonandimmediatelyaftertheprojectoristurnedoff.Partsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatedif
theprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojector
operation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieve
anyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyour
projector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbya
qualiedservicepersonnel.
• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.
• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorre.
• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz(PX750U)/200-240VAC50/60Hz
(PX750UG).Ensurethatyourpowersupplytsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.
• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.
• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthe
lensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancause
anunpredictableoutcomesuchasareorinjurytotheeyes.
• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent.
Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheex-
haust.
• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorre.
- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.
- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.
- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.
iv
Important Information
- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.
- Donotheatthepowercord.
- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.
• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualiedservicepersonnelunder
thefollowingconditions:
- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.
- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.
- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.
- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.
- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.
• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.
• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinetorreplacingthelamp.
• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.
• WhenusingaLANcable:
Forsafety,donotconnecttotheconnectorforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.
CAUTION
• Aminimumoftwopersonsarerequiredtocarrytheprojector.Otherwisetheprojectormaytumbleordrop,caus-
ingpersonalinjury.
• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhilethelensshiftisinoperation.
Failuretodosocouldresultinhandsbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.
• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-
ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.
• Donotsendtheprojectorinthesoftcasebyparceldeliveryserviceorcargoshipment.Theprojectorinsidethe
softcasecouldbedamaged.
• Set[LAMPSELECT]and[LAMPINTERVALMODE]ifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.
(Fromthemenu,select[LAMPMODE]→[LAMPSELECT]and[LAMPINTERVALMODE].)
• BeforeusingDirectPowerOff,besuretoallowatleast20minutesimmediatelyafterturningontheprojectorand
startingtodisplayanimage.
• Donotunplugthepowercordfromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.Doingsocan
causedamagetotheACINconnectoroftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercord.
Toturnoff
theACpo
wersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector'smainpowerswitchora
powerstripequippedwithaswitchandabreaker.
• DonotturnofftheACpowerfor60secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblink-
ingblue.Doingsocouldcauseprematurelampfailure.
• Useofawalloutletwitha20Aormorecircuitbreakerisrecommended.
Caution on Handling the Optional Lens
Whenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcap
tothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdamage
causedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.
Remote Control Precautions
• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.
• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.
• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.
• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.
• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.
• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.
• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.
• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.
v
Important Information
Note for US Residents
Thelampinthisproductcontainsmercury.PleasedisposeaccordingtoLocal,StateorFederalLaws.
Lamp and Color Wheel Replacement
• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.
• Toreplacethelampandthecolorwheel,followallinstructionsprovidedonpage174and208respectively.
• Besuretoreplacethelampwhenthemessage[THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE.
PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP AND FILTER. USE THE SPECIFIED LAMP FOR SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE.]
appears.Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife,thelampbulbmay
shatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycause
injury.
Ifthishappens,contactyourdealerforlampreplacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
Theprojectorhasahigh-pressuremercurylampasalightsource.
Alamphasacharacteristicthatitsbrightnessgraduallydecreaseswithage.Alsorepeatedlyturningthelampon
andoffwillincreasethepossibilityofitslowerbrightness.
CAUTION:
• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPorTHECOLORWHEELimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremely
hot.Tur ntheprojectoroffandthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbefore
handling.
• Whenremovingthelampfromaceiling-mountedprojector,makesurethatnooneisundertheprojector.Glass
fragmentscouldfallifthelamphasbeenburnedout.
Clearance for Installing the Projector
Allowampleclearancebetweentheprojectoranditssurroundingsasshownbelow.
AvoidinstallingtheprojectorinaplacewhereairmovementfromtheHVACisdirectedattheprojector.
HeatedairfromtheHVACcanbetakeninbytheprojector'sintakevent.Ifthishappens,thetemperatureinsidethe
projectorwillrisetoohighcausingtheover-temperatureprotectortoautomaticallyturnofftheprojectorspower.
Example 1 – If there are walls on both sides of the projector.
50 cm/19.7" or greater 30 cm/12" or greater
NOTE:
The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front, back and top of the projector.
vi
Important Information
Example 2 – If there is a wall behind the projector.
(1) For floor installation:
70 cm/27.6" or greater
Lens
NOTE:
The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the back, sides and top of the projector.
(2) For ceiling mounting:
Ceiling mount unit
30 cm/12" or
greater
70 cm/27.6"
or greater
Lens
NOTE:
1. The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front, sides, back and bottom of the projector.
2. If suspending the projector 30 cm/12 inches away from the ceiling, allow ample clearance for all four sides and the under the
projector.
About High Altitude mode
•
Set[FAN
MODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600meters
orhigher.
Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]
cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesand
turnontheprojector.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1600metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]
cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofinternalparts
suchasthelamp.
vii
Important Information
About Copyright of original projected pictures:
Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenue
suchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-
tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.
[ASPECTRATIO],[3DREFORM],[D-ZOOM]featureandothersimilarfeatures.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
Thisdeviceisnotintendedforuseinthedirecteldofviewatvisualdisplayworkplaces.Toavoidincommodingreec-
tionsatvisualdisplayworkplacesthisdevicemustnotbeplacedinthedirecteldofview.
viii
Table of Contents
Important Information ............................................................................................i
1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1
1What’sintheBox? ......................................................................................................... 1
IntroductiontotheProjector .......................................................................................... 2
CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ................................................. 2
Featuresyou’llenjoy: ............................................................................................... 2
Aboutthisuser’smanual .......................................................................................... 3
PartNamesoftheProjector .......................................................................................... 4
Front/Top .................................................................................................................. 4
Rear ......................................................................................................................... 5
ControlPanel/IndicatorSection ............................................................................... 6
TerminalPanelFeatures .......................................................................................... 7
PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ............................................................................... 8
BatteryInstallation ................................................................................................... 9
RemoteControlPrecautions .................................................................................... 9
OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl ........................................................ 9
OperatingEnvironmentforSoftwareIncludedonCD-ROM ........................................ 10
OperatingEnvironment .......................................................................................... 11
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) .............................................. 12
1FlowofProjectinganImage ........................................................................................ 12
ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ............................................. 13
UsingtheSuppliedPowerCordStopper ............................................................... 14
TurningontheProjector .............................................................................................. 16
NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) ...................................... 18
Iftheprojectedimageisinvertedorupsidedown .................................................. 19
SelectingaSource ...................................................................................................... 20
Selectingthecomputerorvideosource................................................................. 20
AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ....................................................................... 21
Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) ............................ 22
Focus ..................................................................................................................... 24
Zoom ...................................................................................................................... 25
AdjustingtheTiltFeet ............................................................................................ 25
CorrectingKeystoneDistortion .................................................................................... 26
OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ................................................................. 28
AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust .................................................................. 28
TurningofftheProjector .............................................................................................. 29
AfterUse...................................................................................................................... 30
3. Convenient Features ..................................................................................... 31
1Blockingthelamplight(LENSSHUTTER) .................................................................. 31
TurningofftheImage ................................................................................................... 31
FreezingaPicture ....................................................................................................... 31
EnlargingaPicture ...................................................................................................... 32
ChangingEcoMode/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingEcoMode[ECO
MODE] ................................................................................................................... 33
ix
Table of Contents
CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ............................................. 34
UsingtheOptionalRemoteMouseReceiver(NP01MR) ............................................ 35
CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] ................ 37
Cornerstone ........................................................................................................... 37
DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime .................................................................. 40
SelectingthePIPorPICTUREBYPICTUREMode[MODE] ................................ 40
[POSITION] ............................................................................................................ 41
PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ................................. 42
StoringChangesforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus[LENSMEMORY] ........................ 45
UsageExample...................................................................................................... 45
Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]: ...................................... 45
Tocallupyouradjustedvaluesfrom[REF.LENSMEMORY]: ............................... 46
ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ................................................. 49
ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectorviaaNetwork
[NETWORKPROJECTOR] .................................................................................... 56
UsingtheProjectortoOperateYourComputerviaaNetwork[REMOTE
DESKTOP] ............................................................................................................. 60
4. Using the Viewer ............................................................................................. 66
❶WhatyoucandowiththeViewer ................................................................................. 66
❷Preparingpresentationmaterials ................................................................................ 69
❸ProjectingimagesstoredinaUSBmemorydevice .................................................... 70
StartingtheViewer ................................................................................................. 70
ExitingtheViewer .................................................................................................. 73
NamesandfunctionsofViewerscreen .................................................................. 74
Vieweroptionsettings ............................................................................................ 79
❹Projectingdatafromsharedfolder .............................................................................. 82
Connectingtheprojectortothesharedfolder ....................................................... 82
Disconnectingthesharedfolderfromtheprojector ............................................... 85
❺Projectingdatafrommediaserver............................................................................... 86
Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer11 ...................................... 86
Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer12 ...................................... 88
Connectingtheprojectortothemediaserver ........................................................ 89
Disconnectingtheprojectorfromthemediaserver ............................................... 90
❻Restrictionsondisplayingles .................................................................................... 91
SomerestrictionsonPowerPointles .................................................................... 91
SomerestrictionsonPDFles .............................................................................. 91
5. Using On-Screen Menu ................................................................................ 92
1UsingtheMenus .......................................................................................................... 92
MenuElements ............................................................................................................ 93
ListofMenuItems ....................................................................................................... 94
MenuDescriptions&Functions[SOURCE] ................................................................ 97
COMPUTER1,2,and3 ........................................................................................ 97
HDMI ...................................................................................................................... 97
DisplayPort ............................................................................................................. 97
VIDEO .................................................................................................................... 97
S-VIDEO ................................................................................................................ 97
x
Table of Contents
VIEWER ................................................................................................................. 97
NETWORK ............................................................................................................. 97
SLOT(foroptionalboard) ...................................................................................... 97
ENTRYLIST .......................................................................................................... 97
TESTPATTERN ..................................................................................................... 97
MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ................................................................ 101
[PICTURE] ........................................................................................................... 101
[IMAGEOPTIONS] .............................................................................................. 104
[VIDEO] ................................................................................................................ 108
UsingtheLensMemoryFunction[LENSMEMORY] ........................................... 109
MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] .................................................................. 110
[BASIC] ................................................................................................................ 110
[MENU] ................................................................................................................ 114
[INSTALLATION(1)] .............................................................................................. 115
[INSTALLATION(2)] .............................................................................................. 119
[OPTIONS(1)] ...................................................................................................... 121
[OPTIONS(2)] ...................................................................................................... 123
MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .................................................................... 125
[USAGETIME] ..................................................................................................... 125
[SOURCE(1)] ....................................................................................................... 126
[SOURCE(2)] ....................................................................................................... 126
[WIREDLAN] ....................................................................................................... 126
[WIRELESSLAN(1)] ............................................................................................ 127
[WIRELESSLAN(2)] ............................................................................................ 127
[VERSION(1)] ...................................................................................................... 127
[VERSION(2)] ...................................................................................................... 128
[OTHERS] ............................................................................................................ 128
8MenuDescriptions&Functions[RESET] .................................................................. 129
ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ................................................................. 129
❾ApplicationMenu ....................................................................................................... 131
IMAGEEXPRESSUTILITY ................................................................................. 131
NETWORKPROJECTOR .................................................................................... 131
REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION .................................................................. 132
NETWORKSETTINGS ........................................................................................ 133
TOOLS ................................................................................................................. 149
6. Connecting to Other Equipment .......................................................... 154
Mountingalens(soldseparately) .............................................................................. 154
Mountingthelens................................................................................................. 154
Removingthelens ............................................................................................... 155
MakingConnections .................................................................................................. 156
AnalogRGBsignalconnection ............................................................................ 156
DigitalRGBsignalconnection ............................................................................. 157
ConnectinganExternalMonitor .......................................................................... 159
ConnectingYourDVDPlayerorOtherAVEquipment .......................................... 160
ConnectingComponentInput .............................................................................. 161
ConnectingHDMIInput........................................................................................ 162
ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ................................................................................. 163
ConnectingtoaWirelessLAN(soldseparately).................................................. 164
MountingawirelessLANunit .............................................................................. 164
ToremovethewirelessLANunit.......................................................................... 166
xi
Table of Contents
Stackingprojectors .............................................................................................. 168
7. Maintenance .................................................................................................... 171
1CleaningtheFilters.................................................................................................... 171
CleaningtheLens...................................................................................................... 173
CleaningtheCabinet ................................................................................................. 173
ReplacingtheLampandtheFilters ........................................................................... 174
ReplacingtheFilters .................................................................................................. 177
8. User Supportware ......................................................................................... 179
InstallingSoftwareProgram ...................................................................................... 179
InstallationforWindowssoftware ......................................................................... 179
InstallationforMacintoshsoftware ....................................................................... 182
ProjectingImagesorVideosfromtheProjectoroveraLAN(ImageExpressUtility
2.0) ....................................................................................................................... 183
WhatyoucandowithImageExpressUtility2.0 .................................................. 183
ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 184
BasicOperationofImageExpressUtility2.0 ....................................................... 185
ControllingtheProjectoroveraLAN(PCControlUtilityPro4) ................................. 194
ProjectingYourMac’sScreenImagefromtheProjectoroveraLAN(Image
ExpressUtility2forMac) ..................................................................................... 195
WhatyoucandowithImageExpressUtility2 ..................................................... 195
Operatingenvironment ........................................................................................ 195
ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 195
UsingImageExpressUtility2 .............................................................................. 196
OperatingtheProjectorViatheLAN(VirtualRemoteTool) ....................................... 199
ConvertingPowerPointlestoSlides(ViewerPPTConverter3.0) ........................... 202
9. Appendix ............................................................................................................. 204
Throwdistanceandscreensize ................................................................................ 204
Lenstypesandthrowdistance ............................................................................ 204
Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions ............................................................... 206
Lensshiftingrange ............................................................................................... 207
❷ReplacingtheColorWheel(included) ....................................................................... 208
StoringUnusedColorWheel: ............................................................................... 210
❸MountingtheOptionalBoard(soldseparately) ......................................................... 211
CompatibleInputSignalList ...................................................................................... 213
Specications ............................................................................................................ 215
Optical .................................................................................................................. 215
Electrical .............................................................................................................. 215
Mechanical ........................................................................................................... 216
Optionlens ........................................................................................................... 217
CabinetDimensions .................................................................................................. 218
PinAssignmentsofD-SubCOMPUTERInputConnector ........................................ 219
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 220
IndicatorMessages .............................................................................................. 220
CommonProblems&Solutions ........................................................................... 222
Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. .............................. 224
xii
Table of Contents
PCControlCodesandCableConnection ................................................................. 225
TroubleshootingCheckList ........................................................................................ 226
TravelCareGuide ....................................................................................................... 228
1
Projector
1. Introduction
1 What’s in the Box?
Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.
Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.
Power cord
(US: 79TM1001 for AC 120 V/
79TM1011 for AC 200 V)
(EU: 79TM1021)
Lens theft prevention screw (79TM1071)
This screw makes it difficult to remove the
lens mounted on the projector. (→ page 155)
6-segment color wheel (79TM1081)
Stacking holders (x 3) (79TM1101)
Power cord stopper (79TM1111)
Anti-theft cap for LAN unit (for optional wireless LAN unit)
(79TM1091)
NEC Projector CD-ROM
User’s manual (PDF) and the utility
software
(7N951621)
For North America only
Registrationcard
Limitedwarranty
For customers in Europe:
You willndourcurrentvalidGuar-
anteePolicyonourWebSite:
www.nec-display-solutions.com
• ImportantInformation(ForNorthAmerica:
7N8N1821) (For Other countries than North
America: 7N8N1821 and 7N8N1981)
• QuickSetupGuide(ForNorthAmerica:
7N8N1831) (For Other countries than North
America: 7N8N1831 and 7N8N1841)
Remote control
(7N900961)
AA alkaline batteries
(x2)
Dust cap for lens (79TM1061)
* The projector is shipped without a lens. For
the types of lens and throw distances, see
page 204.
2
1. Introduction
Introduction to the Projector
Thissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector
Thisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimages
upto500inches(200or300inchesdependingontheoptionallens)across(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCor
Macintoshcomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,DVDplayer,ordocumentcamera.
Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,
andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*
1
.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.
*
1
Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.
Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk
ofbodilyinjury.
Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance
withanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.
Features you’ll enjoy:
• DLP
®
projector with high resolution and high brightness
Highresolutiondisplay–WUXGA(1920×1200)nativeresolution(16:10)
• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation
Thisprojectorsupports6typesofoptionallenses,providing
aselection
oflensesadaptedforavarietyofinstallation
requirements.
Inaddition,thelensescanbemountedandremovedinonetouch.
Notethatnolensismounteduponshipmentfromthefactory.Pleasepurchaseoptionallensesseparately.
• DualLampsystem
Twolampsystemoffersincreasedlamplifeandenergysavingsalongwithredundancy.
• Doublestackableforbuiltinredundancyandhighlightoutputrequirements
Doublestackingprojectorsincreasethebrightnessandvisibility.
• PoweredLensShift,Zoom,andFocusofferinstallationexibility
PoweredHorizontalandVerticallensshiftprovidestheabilitytoprojectfromoffcenterscreeninstallations.Powered
zoomandfocusprovidequickandeasyadjustment.
• Twotypesofcolorwheels(6-segmentwhite)and(6-segmentcolor)interchangeable
Theprojectoris shippedwiththe 6-segmentwhitecolorwheelinstalled.Youcan replaceitwiththeincluded
6-segmentcolorwheeltocreateimageswithmorebrilliantcolorstomatchthesource.
• Widerangeofinput/outputconnectors(HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,etc.)
Theprojectorisequippedwithavarietyofinput/outputconnectors:computer(analog),5BNC,HDMI,DisplayPort,
Video,S-Video,etc.(Thecomputer(analog)andBNCconnectorsalsosupportcomponentinputs.)
Theprojector’sHDMIandDisplayPortinputconnectorssupportHDCP.
• Slotforoptionalboard
Theprojectorhasaslot
for
theoptionalboard(SB-01HCorotherNEC’sinterfaceboards).
• Highpicturequalityprocessingcircuit
IDTHQVprocessingtechnologyisusedtoprojecthighqualityimages.
• Energy-savingdesignwithastandbypowerconsumptionof0.4Wattsorless
Whentheon-screenmenu’sstandbymodeissetto“PowerSaving”,thepowerconsumptioninthestandbymode
is0.2W(100-120VAC)/0.4W(200-240VAC).
3
1. Introduction
• “Ecomode”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display
Theprojectorisequippedwithan“ecomode” for reducing powerconsumptionduringuse.Furthermore,the
power-savingeffectwhentheecomodeissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO
2
emissionsand
thisisindicatedontheconrmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”onthe
on-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).
• Seamlessswitchfunctionforsmootherscreenchangeswhenswitchingthesignal
Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldsothatthatprojectorcanwrite
thenewimagewithoutgoingtoblack.
• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)
Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.
Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthe
mainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.
• Securityfunctionforpreventingunauthorizeduse
Thisprojectorisequippedwiththefollowingsecurityfunctions:
- Passwordsecurity:Whenapasswordissetintheon-screenmenu,ascreentoinputthepasswordappears
whentheprojector’spoweristurnedon.
- Theftpreventionlock:Asecurity
cablecompatiblewithKensingtonlockscanbeconnectedtotheprojector.
•
Wired/wirelessLANcompatibility(wirelessLANunitsoldseparately)
TheprojectorisequippedwithaLANport(RJ-45)forconnectiontoawiredLANfortransferringimagesfroma
computertotheprojector,controllingtheprojectorfromacomputer,etc.
Furthermore,theprojectorcanbeusedinawirelessLANbymountingtheseparatelysoldwirelessLANunit
(NP02LM).
• Convenientutilitysoftware(UserSupportware)providedasstandard
Threeutilitysoftwareprograms(ImageExpressUtility2.0,PCControlUtilityPro4,ImageExpressUtility2forMac)
areprovidedontheincludedNECProjectorCD-ROM.Twomoreutilitysoftwareprogramscanbedownloaded
fromourwebsite:VirtualRemoteToolandViewerPPTConverter3.0.
• LAN-compatibleviewerfunction
StillandmovingimagesinsharedfoldersonacomputerconnectedbywiredorwirelessLANcanbeprojected
withtheprojector’sviewer.
- TheviewersupportstheWindowsMediaPlayer11’s“mediasharing”function.
• CrestronRoomView
®
compatibility
TheprojectorsupportsCrestronRoomView
®
,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedinthenetworktobemanaged
andcontrolledfromacomputer.
About this user’s manual
Thefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthersttime.Takeafewminutesnowto
reviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llnd
anoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.
4
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Projector
Front/Top
Thelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP18ZLlensismounted.
Control Panel
(→ page 6)
Lens
Ventilation (inlet)
Filter Cover
Remote Sensor (located on the
front and the rear)
(→ page 9)
Remote Sensor
(→ page 9)
Terminal Panel
(→ page 7)
IndicatorSection
(→ page 6)
Lens Release Button
(→ page 155)
ACInput
Connect the supplied power cord's
three-pin plug here, and plug the
other end into an active wall outlet.
(→ page 13)
Main Power Switch
USB (LAN) Port (for optional Wire-
less LAN Unit) (→ page 164)
Lens Cap
(The lens cap is attached to the
lens.)
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(→ page 25)
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(→ page 25)
Built-in Security Slot ( )*
Slot for Power Cord Stopper (→
page 14)
* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver
®
SecuritySystem.
5
1. Introduction
Rear
CAUTION:
PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe
ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
Remote Sensor (located on the
front and the rear)
(→ page 9)
Color Wheel Cover
(→ page 208)
Ventilation (inlet)
Filter Cover (→ page 171, 177)
Ventilation (outlet)
Heated air is exhausted from here.
Lamp Cover (1)
(→ page 175, 176)
Lamp Cover (2)
(→ page 175, 176)
Stacking Holder
(3 locations)
6
1. Introduction
Control Panel/Indicator Section
1. (POWER) Button (→page17, 29)
2. POWER Indicator (→page17, 29, 220)
3. STATUS Indicator (→page220)
4. LAMP1andLAMP2Indicators(→page174, 221)
5. TEMP. Indicator (→page221)
6. SHUTTERIndicator(→page221)
7. SOURCE Button (→page20)
8. AUTO ADJ. Button (→page28)
9. 3D REFORM Button (→page37)
10.ORIENTATIONButton(→page19)
11.SHUTTER/HOMEPOSITIONButton(→page22, 31)
NOTE: The “home position” for lens shift position is not the center position of the adjustable lens shift range. The home position
should be used for lens installation.
12. MENU Button (→page92)
13. Buttons (→page92)
14.ENTERButton(→page92)
15. EXIT Button (→page92)
16.LENSSHIFT Buttons (→page22)
17.FOCUS+/−Buttons(→page24)
18.ZOOM+/−Buttons(→page25)
1
12 13 1514 16 17 18
7 8 9 10 11 2 3 4 5 6
7
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
1. COMPUTER1IN/ComponentInputConnector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)(→ page 13,156,161)
2. COMPUTER2IN/ComponentInputConnector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)(→ page 156,161)
3. COMPUTER3IN/Component(R/Cr,G/Y,B/Cb,H,V)Connectors(BNC×5)(→ page 156,161)
4. HDMIINConnector(TypeA)(→ page 157,158,162)
5. DisplayPortINConnector(DisplayPort20P)(→ page 157)
6. MONITOROUT(COMP1)Connector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)(→ page 159)
7. VIDEOINConnector(BNC)(→ page 160)
8. S-VIDEOINConnector(MiniDIN4Pin)(→ page 160)
9. LANPort(RJ-45)(→ page 163)
10.USBPort(TypeA)(→ page 70)
11.PCCONTROLPort(D-Sub9Pin)(→ page 225)
UsethisporttoconnectaPCorcontrolsystem.Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommunica-
tionprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage225.
12. REMOTE Connector (Stereo Mini)
UsethisconnectorforwiredremotecontroloftheprojectorusingtheNECoptionalremotecontrol.
Connecttheprojectorandoptionalremotecontrolusingacommerciallyavailablewiredremotecontrolcable.
13. USB (LAN) Port
(for optional Wireless LAN Unit) (→ page 164)
14.OptionalSlot(SLOT)(→ page 211)
9 4 5 3 810 2 1 7
1311 12 14 6
8
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Remote Control
1. Infrared Transmitter
(→page9)
2. POWER ON Button
(→page17)
3. POWER OFF Button
(→page29)
4,5,6.COMPUTER1/2/3Button
(→page20)
7. AUTO ADJ. Button
(→page28)
8. VIDEOButton
(→page20)
9. S-VIDEOButton
(→page20)
10.HDMIButton(→page20)
11. DisplayPort Button (→page20)
12.VIEWERButton(→page20, 66)
13. NETWORK Button (→page20)
14.SOURCEButton(→page20)
15. PIP Button (→page20, 40)
16.IDSETButton(→page120)
17.NumericKeypadButton/CLEARButton
(→page120)
18. MENU Button (→page92)
19. EXIT Button (→page92)
20. Button (→page92)
21. ENTER Button (→page92)
22.L-CLICKButton*(→page36)
23.R-CLICKButton*(→page36)
24.VOLUME(+)(−)Button(Notavailable)
25.D-ZOOM(+)(−)Button(→page32)
26.PAGE/Button*(→page36)
27. PICTURE Button (→page101, 103)
28. ECO Button (→page33)
29. ASPECT Button (→page106)
30.AV-MUTEButton(→page31)
31. 3D REFORM Button (→page37)
32.FREEZEButton(→page31)
33. SHUTTER Button (→page31)
34.LENSSHIFTButton(→page22)
35.FOCUS/ZOOMButton(
→page24, 25)
36.
HELPButton(→page125)
* ThePAGE/, ,L-CLICKandR-CLICKbuttonsworkonlywhenaUSBcableisconnectedwithyourcom-
puter.
1
3
5
4
8
9
12
13
2
6
7
11
10
15
14
17
16
18
22
24
25
27
28
21
19
20
23
26
29
30
33
34
32
31
36
35
9
1. Introduction
Battery Installation
Remote Control Precautions
• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.
• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.
• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.
• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.
• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.
• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.
• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.
• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.
7 m/22 feet
7 m/22 feet
15°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
15°
7 m/22 feet
7 m/22 feet
Remote control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabout22feet/7mandwithina60-degreeangleof
theremotesensorontheprojectorcabinet.
• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfalls
onthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.
1
Pressthecatchandremove
thebatterycover.
2
Install new ones (AA). Ensure
thatyouhavethebatteries’polar-
ity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
3
Slipthecoverbackoverthebatteriesuntilit
snapsintoplace.
NOTE: Do not mix different types of batteries or
new and old batteries.
1
2
1
2
10
1. Introduction
Operating Environment for Software Included on CD-ROM
NamesandFeaturesofBundledSoftwarePrograms
Nameofsoftwareprogram Features
ImageExpressUtility2.0 • Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtosendthescreensofyourpersonalcomput-
erstotheprojectorviawired/wirelessLAN(Meetingmode).
Projectedimagescanbetransferredandsavedtopersonalcomputers.
When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandsavedto
thepersonalcomputers.Imagescanbesentfromapersonalcomputerto
notonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.
(→page183)
PCControlUtilityPro4 Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtooperatetheprojectorfromthecomputerwhen
thecomputerandtheprojectorareconnectedwithLAN(wiredorwireless)or
aserialcable.(→page194)
ImageExpressUtilityforMac • ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtosendtheMac’sscreenimagetotheprojec-
toroveranetwork(wiredorwirelessLAN).ForMac’soperatingenvironment,
seepage195.
*AseparatelysoldwirelessLANunitisrequiredtouseawirelessLAN.
NOTE:
• ImageExpressUtilityforMacdoesnotsupport“MeetingMode”whichisprovidedinImageExpressUtility2.0.
Thefollowingsoftwareprogramscanbedownloadedfromourwebsite.
Nameofsoftwareprogram Features
VirtualRemoteTool Whenthecomputerandprojectorareconnectedusinganetwork(wired/wireless
LAN),suchoperationsasturningtheprojector’spoweronandoffandswitching
thesignalcanbeperformed.Itisalsopossibletosendanimagetotheprojector
andregisteritasthebackgroundlogo.Oncetheimageisregistered,itcanbe
lockedtopreventthelogofrombeingoverwritten.(→page199)
ViewerPPTConverter3.0 ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtoconvertlescreatedwithPowerPointinto
JPEGlesthatcanbedisplayedwiththeviewerfunctionoftheprojectorwhen
aUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheprojector.(→page202)
Download service
Fordownloadingorupdatingthesesoftwareprograms,visitourwebsite:
URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
11
1. Introduction
Operating Environment
ThefollowingistheoperatingenvironmentforImageExpressUtility2.0.Fortheoperatingenvironmentofothersoft-
wareprogram,refertothehelpfunctionofeachsoftwareprogram.
SupportedOS Windows7HomeBasic
Windows7HomePremium
Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaHomeBasic
WindowsVistaHomePremium
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
WindowsXPHomeEditionServicePack2orlater
WindowsXPProfessionalServicePack2orlater
WindowsXPTabletPCEdition2005orlater(WindowsXPTabletPCEditionService
Pack2orlater)
• Only32-bitversion
* “EasyConnection”supportstheAdministrativeprivilegesofWindowsXPandWindows7/
WindowsVistaonly
• Windowspower-savingfunctionisnotsupported.
Processor • Windows7/WindowsVista
Pentium4/PentiumM800MHzequivalentorhigherrequired
Dualcore1GHzorhigherrecommended
• WindowsXP
PentiumIII800MHzorhigherrequired
Pentium41.6GHzorhigherrecommended
Memory • Windows7/WindowsVista
512MBormorerequired
1GBormorerecommended
• WindowsXP
128MBormorerequired
192MBormorerecommended
*Morememorymayberequiredtorunadditionalapplicationssimultaneously.
Graphicprocessor • Windows7/WindowsVista
The“Graphics”score3.0ormoreof“WindowsExperienceIndex”recommended.
Networkenvironment TCP/IP-compatiblewiredLANorwirelessLAN
(*UseawirelessLANunitcomplyingwiththeWi-Fistandard.)
Resolution • Windows7/WindowsVista
SVGA(800×600)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
• Windows
XP
VG
A(640×480)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
ScreenColors HighColor(15bits,16bits)
TrueColor(24bits,32bits)(recommended)
• 256orfewercolorsarenotsupported.
12
Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.
1 Flow of Projecting an Image
Step 1
• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→page13)
Step 2
• Turningontheprojector(→page16)
Step 3
• Selectingasource(→page20)
Step 4
• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→page21)
• Correctingkeystonedistortion[KEYSTONE](→page26)
Step 5
• Adjustingapicture
- Optimizing a computer signal automatically (→ page 28)
Step 6
• Makingapresentation
Step 7
• Turningofftheprojector(→page29)
Step 8
• Afteruse(→page30)
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
13
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord
NOTE:
• Installalensbeforeperformingthefollowingsteps.(→ page 154)
1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.
This section will show you a basic connection to a computer. For information about other connections, see “(2)
Making Connections” on page 156.
Connectthecomputercable(VGA)betweentheprojector’sCOMPUTER1INconnectorandthecomputer’sport
(miniD-Sub15Pin).Tur n twothumbscrewsofbothconnectorstoxthecomputercable(VGA).
2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.
WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.
DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGS
CANBEFULLYINSERTED.
ImportantInformation:
• Whenplugginginorunpluggingthesuppliedpowercord,makesurethatthemainpowerswitchispushedto
the off [O] position. Failure to do so may cause damage to the projector.
• Donotuseathree-phasepowersupply.Doingsomaycausemalfunction.
Firstconnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplugtotheACINoftheprojector,andthenconnecttheother
plug of the supplied power cord in the wall outlet.
COMPUTER 1 IN
Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into
boththeACINandthewalloutlet.
Main power switch
To wall outlet
NOTE(forNorthAmericaonly)
• ThemodeldistributedinNorthAmericacomeswithtwodifferenttypesofpowercords:onefor120Vandtheotherfor200V.
Usethepowercordsuitableforthevoltagebeingused.
CAUTION:
PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe
ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
14
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Using the Supplied Power Cord Stopper
TopreventthepowercordfromaccidentlyremovingfromtheACINoftheprojector,attachthesuppliedpowercord
stoppertoclampthepowercord.
NOTE:
• Donotclampthepowercordwithothercables.Doingsocangeneratenoise,whichcanaffectadverselythesignalcable.
CAUTION
• Donotbundlethepowercord.Doingthiscouldcauseheatorare.
• Donotclamptwopowercordsthatwouldbeusedwhenstackingtwoprojectors.Doingthiscouldcausea
re.
NOTE:Becarefulnottoinsertthebandinversely.Oncethebandisattached,itcannotberemovedfromtheslot.
Attaching the power cord stopper
1. InserttheendofbandofthepowercordstopperintotheslotnexttotheACINontheterminalpanel.
2. Usethepowercordstoppertoclampthepowercord.
Push the clamper to lock it.
Clamper
3. Slidetheclampertothehiltofthepowercord.
15
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Removingthepowercordfromthepowercordstopper
1. Pushtheclamperofthepowercordstoppertounclaspit.
2. Pushthepowercordclampertoopenitwideenoughtopulloutthepowercord.
Clamper
16
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Turning on the Projector
NOTE:
• Theprojectorhastwopowerswitches:AmainpowerswitchandaPOWERbutton(POWERONandOFFontheremotecontrol)
•Turningontheprojector:
1. PressthemainpowerswitchtotheONposition(I).
The projector will go into standby mode.
2. PressthePOWERbutton.
The projector will become ready to use.
•Turningofftheprojector:
1. PressthePOWERbutton.
The confirmation message will be displayed.
2. PressthePOWERbuttonagain.
The projector will go into standby mode.
3. PressthemainpowerswitchtotheOFFposition(O).
The projector will be turned off.
Removethelenscap.
1. PressthemainpowerswitchtotheONposition(I).
The projector will go into standby mode. When in standby
mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the STA-
TUS indicator will light green when [NORMAL] is selected
for[STANDBYMODE].SeethePowerIndicatorsection.
(→ page 220)
17
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
2. Pressthe (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinet
orthePOWERONbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The POWER indicator will turn to blue and the projector
will become ready to use.
TIP:
• Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOUR
PASSWORD.” is displayed, it means that the [SECURITY]
featureisturnedon.(→ page 42)
• When theECO message isdisplayed, it meansthat [ON] is
selectedfor[ECOMESSAGE].(→ page 114)
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer
or video source is turned on.
NOTE:Abluescreen(bluebackground)isdisplayedwhennosignal
isbeinginput(byfactorydefaultmenusettings).
Standby Blinking PowerOn
Steady orange
light
Blinking blue
light
Steady blue
light
(→page220)
18
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)
Whenyourstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectone
ofthe27menulanguages.
Toselectamenulanguage,followthesesteps:
1. Usethe, , or buttontoselectoneofthe27lan-
guagesfromthemenu.
2. PresstheENTERbuttontoexecutetheselection.
Afterthishasbeendone,youcanproceedtothemenuopera-
tion.
Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.
(→[LANGUAGE]onpage95and113)
NOTE:
• Turningthepowerbackondirectlyafteritisturnedoff(bydirectpoweroff)whileanimageisbeingprojectedcanresultin
malfunction. Be sure to wait at least 1 second before turning the power back on.
• Keepthelenscapoffthelenswhiletheprojector’spowerison.
If the lens cap is on, it could be warped due to high temperature.
• Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.
- If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this condition the
projectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocool
down.
- Startingunderlowtemperatureconditions
Iftheusageenvironmenttemperatureislowerthantheprojector’soperatingtemperature,theTEMP.indicatorwillash.Increase
theusageenvironmenttemperatureto0°Corhigherandturnontheprojectoragain.
Ifyouturnontheprojectorataround0°C,itmaytake5minutestowarmuptheprojector.
Duringwarm-up,theTEMP.indicatorwillash.Whenthewarm-upiscompleted,theTEMP.indicatorwilllightout.
- Whenthelampreachesitsendofusablelife,theprojectorwillnotturnon.Ifthishappens,replacethelamp.
- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.
Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→ page 119)
- Ifthelamp
fails
tolight,andiftheLAMP1orLAMP2indicatorashesonandoffinacycleofsixtimes,waitafullminuteand
then turn on the power.
• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.
• Immediatelyafterturningontheprojector,screenickermayoccur.Thisisnormal.Wait3to5minutesuntilthelamplightingis
stabilized.
• Whentheprojectoristurnedon,itmaytakesometimebeforethelamplightbecomesbright.
• Ifyouturnontheprojectorimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedofforwhenthetemperatureishigh,thefansrunwithoutdisplay-
ing an image for some time and then the projector will display the image.
19
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
If the projected image is inverted or upside down
1 PresstheORIENTATIONbutton.
The[ORIENTATION]screenwillbedisplayed.
2 Pressagaintoselectacorrectorientation.
EachtimetheORIENTATIONbuttonispressed,thechoiceyouhighlight
will be changed.
DESKTOP FRONT DESKTOP REAR
CEILINGFRONT CEILINGREAR
3 StoppressingtheORIENTATIONbutton.
The menu will be closed and the projected image will be displayed in
the correct orientation you select.
20
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
NOTE:Turnonthecomputerorvideosourceequipmentconnectedtotheprojector.
Detecting the Signal Automatically
PresstheSOURCEbuttononce.Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailable
inputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:
COMPUTER1→COMPUTER2→COMPUTER3→HDMI→DisplayPort
→VIDEO→S-VIDEO→VIEWER→SLOT→COMPUTER1→ ...
• WiththeSOURCEscreendisplayed,youcanpresstheSOURCE
buttonafewtimestoselecttheinputsource.
TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.
Using the Remote Control
PressanyoneoftheCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,COMPUTER3,HDMI,
DisplayPort,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,VIEWER,orNETWORKbuttons.
Selecting Default Source
Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayed
eachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Pressthebuttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthebut-
tonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BASIC].
3.
Pressthe
buttonvetimestoselect[OPTIONS(2)].
4. Press the button ve times to select [DEFAULT SOURCE
SELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] screen will be displayed.
(→ page 124)
5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbut-
ton.
6. PresstheEXITbuttonafewtimes
toclosethemenu.
7.
Restarttheprojector.
The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.
NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[NETWORK]willnotbeautomatically
selected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[NETWORK].
TIP:
• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignal froma
computerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1/3INinputwillpowerontheprojector
andsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.
([AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)]→ page 124)
• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallows
you to set up external display easily and quickly.
21
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
Usethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfootlever,thezoombuttonsandthefocusbuttonstoadjustthepicturesize
andposition.
Inthischapterdrawingsandcablesareomittedforclarity.
Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontal
position
[Lensshift]
Adjustingthefocus
[Focus]
(→ page 22) (→ page 24)
Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage
[Zoom]
Adjusting the projected image’s height and horizontal
tilt
[Tiltfoot]*¹
(→ page 25) (→ page 25)
Adjustingthekeystonecorrection
[Keystone]
(→ page 26)
NOTE*1: Adjusttheprojectedimage’sheightusingthetiltfeetwhenyouwanttoprojecttheimageatapositionhigherthanthe
lens shift adjustment range.
TIP:
• Built-intestpatternscanbeconvenientlyusedforadjustingthepicturesizeandposition.(→ page 97)
Thelensshift,focusandzoomadjustmentsarenotavailablewiththeremotecontrolwhenthetestpatternisdisplayed.
22
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)
CAUTION
• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Adjustingfrom
thefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.
• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhilethelensshiftisinoperation.
Failuretodosocouldresultinhandsbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.
NOTE:
• ThelensshiftfunctionisnotavailableontheprojectorwithNP16FLlensinstalled.
Returnthelensshiftpositiontothehomepositionbeforeinstallingthelenstotheprojector.
• Shiftingthelenstothemaximumintwodirectionscombinedwillcausetheedgesoftheimagetobecomedarkorwillcause
some shadows.
Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet
1. PressoneoftheLENSSHIFT▼▲◀▶buttons.
2. UsetheLENSSHIFT▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.
Returningthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition
PressandholdtheSHUTTER/HOMEPOSITIONbuttonfor2secondstoreturnthelensshiftpositiontothehome
position(nearlycenterposition)
23
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting with the remote control
1. PresstheLENSSHIFTbutton.
The Lens Shift screen will be displayed.
2. Pressthe▼▲◀ or ▶button.
Use the ▼▲◀▶ buttons to move the projected image.
TIP:
• Thediagrambelowshowsthelensshiftadjustmentrangeforthedesktopfront.Toraisetheprojectionpositionhigherthanthis,
usethetiltfeet.(→ page 25)
• Fortheceilingmount/frontprojectionlensshiftadjustmentrange,seepage207.
1V
1H
0.1H 0.1H
0.5V
Height of projected image
Width of projected image
1V
1H
0.1H 0.1H
0.5V
Height of projected image
Width of projected image
24
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Focus
Applicablelens:NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL
UsetheFOCUS(+)or(−)buttonontheprojectorcabinettoobtainthebestfocus.
TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forxedinstallation)
Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.
1.UsetheFOCUS+/−buttonstomakesureyouobtainthebestfocus.Ifyoudonot,movetheprojectorbackandforth.
2.Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 97)
3.KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternismadeinvisible.
4.KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus.
If you adjust beyond the best focal point, go back to step 3 and repeat the procedures.
25
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the Tilt Feet
• Turn the left and right tilt feet on the right, left, and rear to
adjust.
Thetiltfeetlengthenandshortenwhenturned.
Theheightoftheprojectedimageisadjustedbyturningtheleft
andrighttiltfeet.
Iftheprojectedimageistilted,turnoneofthetiltfeettoadjust
theimagesothatitislevel.
- Iftheprojectedimageisdistorted,see“2-6CorrectingKeystone
Distortion” (→ page 26).
- The tilt feet can be used to tilt +/− 50 mm/1.97" (6.75°), −9 mm/0.35"
(1.2°).
CAUTION
Therearventsoftheprojectormaybecomeheatedduringnormal
projectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenadjustingthetiltfootontherearside.
NOTE:
• Donotlengthenthetiltfeetontherightandleftanymorethan50mm/1.97"and
thetiltfootontherearanymorethan9mm/0.35"ontherear.Theforceofdoing
so may cause the rear foot to come off, resulting in damage to the projector.
• Donot usethetiltfeet foranypurposeotherthan adjustingtheprojector’s
projection angle.
Handling the tilt feet improperly, such as carrying the projector by grasping the tilt
feet or hooking it onto a wall using the tilt feet, could damage the projector.
Zoom
UsetheZOOM(+)or(−)buttonontheprojectorcabinettozoominorout.
• ThezoomisnotavailableontheseparatelysoldNP16Llens.
Up
Tilt foot
Down
26
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Correcting Keystone Distortion
Whentheprojectorisnotexactlyperpendiculartothescreen,keystonedistortionoccurs.Toovercomeit,youcanuse
the“Keystone”function,adigitaltechnologythatcanadjustforkeystone-typedistortion,resultinginacrisp,square
image.
Thefollowingprocedureexplainshowtousethe[KEYSTONE]screenfromthemenutocorrecttrapezoidaldistor-
tions.
Whentheprojectorisplaceddiagonallytothescreen,
Whentheprojectorissetupatanangleinrelationtothescreen,adjusttheHorizontaloptionoftheKeystonemenu
sothatthetopandbottomofsidesoftheprojectedimageareparallel.
1. Pressthe3DREFORMbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojec-
torcabinet.
The Keystone screen will be displayed on the screen.
2. Pressthe
buttontoselect[VERTICAL]andthenusethe
or
sothattheleftandrightsidesoftheprojectedimageareparallel.
* Adjust the vertical keystone distortion.
3. Aligntheleft(orright)sideofthescreenwiththeleft(orright)side
oftheprojectedimage.
• Usetheshortersideoftheprojectedimageasthebase.
• Intherightexample,usetheleftsideasthebase.
4. Pressthe
buttontoselect[HORIZONTAL]andthenusethe
or
sothatthetopandbottomsidesof
the
projectedimagearepar-
allel.
• Adjustthehorizontalkeystonedistortion.
Screen frame
Projected area
Align left side
27
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
NOTE:
• Iftheprojectionangleisthesameasinthelastuse,thepreviouscorrectionsettingvaluesareretainedinthememory.
• WhendoingStep2,adjustthepositionofimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheprojectedarea.
• Toresetthe3DReformcorrectionsettingvalues,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2seconds.
• Eachtimethe3DREFORMbuttonispressed,theitemwillchangeasfollows:KEYSTONE→CORNERSTONE→ None →KEY-
STONE→ ...
Forinformationon[CORNERSTONE],see“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion(Cornerstone)”onpage37.
• TheCornerstoneadjustmentwillnotbeavailableduringtheKeystoneadjustment.ToperformtheCornerstoneadjustment,press
andholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresettheKeystonecorrectionsettingvalues.TheKeystone
adjustmentwillnotbeavailableduringtheCornerstoneadjustment.ToperformtheKeystoneadjustment,pressandholdthe3D
REFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresettheCornerstonecorrectionsettingvalues.
• The3DReformfeaturecancauseanimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.
5. Repeatsteps2and4tocorrectkeystonedistortion.
6. AftercompletingKeystonecorrection,presstheEXITbutton.
The Keystone screen will disappear.
• ToperformKeystonecorrectionagain,pressthe3DREFORMbutton
to display the Keystone screen and repeat above steps 1 to 6.
28
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizingacomputerimageautomatically.(COMPUTER1/COMPUTER2/COMPUTER3)
PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.
Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthersttime.
[Poor picture]
[Normal picture]
NOTE:
Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.
• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]
manually.(→ page 104, 105)
29
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Turning off the Projector
To turn off the projector:
1. First,press the (POWER) buttononthe projector
cabinetorthePOWEROFFbuttonontheremotecon-
trol.
The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE ? / CARBON SAV-
INGS-SESSION0.000[g-CO2]]messagewillappear.
2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the
(POWER)orthePOWEROFFbuttonagain.
The lamp will turn off and the projector will go into standby
mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will
light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when
[NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE].
3. PressthemainpowerswitchtotheOFFposition(O).
The POWER indicator will go off and the main power will
turn off.
PowerOn
Steady blue light
Standby
Steady
orange light
Press twice
CAUTION:
PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe
ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
NOTE:
• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.
• Youcannotturnoffthepowerfor60secondsimmediatelyafterturningitonanddisplayinganimage.
• Waitatleast20minutesafterthepoweristurnedon(afterstartingtoproject)beforeturningtheACpoweroffwhileanimageis
being projected or while the cooling fan is running.
• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocould
deterioratetheprojector’sACinputconnectororthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowerwhileanimageisbeing
projected,usetheprojector'smainpowerswitch,thepowerstrip’sswitch,thebreaker,etc.
• DonotdisconnecttheACpowersupplytotheprojectorwithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentorsettingchangesandclosing
the menu. Doing so can cause loss of adjustments and settings.
30
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
After Use
Preparation:Makesurethattheprojectoristurnedoff.
1. Unplugthepowercord.
2. Disconnectanyothercables.
• RemovetheUSBmemoryifitisinsertedintotheprojector.
3. Mountthelenscaponthelens.
4. Beforemovingtheprojector,screwinthetiltfeetiftheyhavebeenlengthened.
31
3. Convenient Features
1 Blocking the lamp light (LENS
SHUTTER)
PresstheSHUTTER/HOMEPOSITIONbuttontoblockthelampslight
fromhittingthescreen.Pressagaintoallowthescreentobecomeil-
luminatedagain.
• AnotherwaytoshutthelamplightoffistopresstheSHUTTERbutton
ontheremotecontrol.
NOTE:
• DonotpressandholdtheSHUTTER/HOMEPOSITIONbuttonfor2secondsor
longer.
Doing so will cause the lens shift position to return to the home position.
Turning off the Image
PresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimageforashortperiodoftime.
Pressagaintorestoretheimage.
Theprojector’spower-savingfunctionwillworkinsomesecondsafterthe
imageisturnedoff.Asaresult,thelamppowerwillbereduced.
NOTE:
• Torestoretheimage,evenifyoupresstheAV-MUTEbuttonimmediatelyafter
thestartofthepower-savingfunction,thelampbrightnessmaynotberestored
toitsoriginallevel.
Freezing a Picture
PresstheFREEZEbuttontofreezeapicture.Pressagaintoresume
motion.
NOTE:Theimageisfrozenbuttheoriginalvideoisstillplayingback.
32
3. Convenient Features
Enlarging a Picture
Youcanenlargethepictureuptofourtimes.
NOTE:Themaximummagnicationmaybelessthanfourtimesdependingon
the signal.
Todoso:
1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.
2. Pressthebutton.
The area of the magnified image will be moved
3. PresstheD-ZOOM(−)button.
Each time the D-ZOOM (−) button is pressed, the image is reduced.
NOTE:
• Theimagewillbeenlargedorreducedatthecenterofthescreen.
• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnication.
33
3. Convenient Features
Changing Eco Mode/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using
Eco Mode [ECO MODE]
Thisfeatureenablesyoutoselecttwobrightnessmodesofthelamp:
OFFandONmodes.Thelamplifecanbeextendedbyturningonthe[ECOMODE].
[ECOMODE] Description
[OFF] Thisisthedefaultsetting(100%Brightness).
[ON]
Lowlamppowerconsumption(approx.80%Brightness).
Toturnonthe[ECOMODE],dothefollowing:
1. PresstheECObuttonontheremotecontroltodisplay[ECOMODE]screen.
2. Usethe
or
buttontoselect[ON].
3. PresstheENTERbutton.
To changefrom[ON]to[OFF],GobacktoStep2andselect[OFF].RepeatStep3.
NOTE:
• The[ECOMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu.
Select[SETUP]→[BASIC]→[LAMPMODE]→[ECOMODE].
• Thelampliferemainingandlamphoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].
• [ECOMODE]isalwayssetto[OFF]immediatelyafterthelampisturnedon.Thelampconditionwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen
[ECOMODE]ischanged.
• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[ECOMODE]willautomaticallyswitchto
[ON].
34
3. Convenient Features
Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]
Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO
2
emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[ECOMODE]
issetto[OFF],or[ON].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].
Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBON
SAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO
2
emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Yo u can
checktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page125)
The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO
2
emissionreductionbetweenthetimeof
changingtoECOMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-
SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.
TIP:
• TheformulaasshownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO
2
emission reduction.
AmountofCO
2
emissionreduction=(PowerconsumptioninOFFforECOMODE−PowerconsumptioninONforECOMODE)×
CO
2
conversionfactor.*Whentheimageisturnedoff,theamountofCO
2
emission reduction will also increase.
*CalculationforamountofCO
2
emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO
2
EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008
Edition”.
• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.
• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[ECOMODE]isturnedonoroff.
35
3. Convenient Features
Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR)
Theoptionalremotemousereceiverenablesyoutooperateyourcomputer’smousefunctionsfromtheremotecontrol.
Itisagreatconvenienceforclickingthroughyourcomputer-generatedpresentations.
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer
Ifyouwishtousetheremotemousefunction,connectthemousereceiverandcomputer.
Themousereceivercanbeconnecteddirectlytothecomputer’sUSBport(typeA).
NOTE:DependingonthetypeofconnectionorOSinstalledonyourcomputer,youmayhavetorestartyourcomputerorchange
your computer settings.
Remote mouse receiver
Computer
To USB port of PC or Macintosh
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver
Remote sensor on the remote mouse receiver
7 m/22 feet
When connecting using the USB terminal
ForPC,themousereceivercanonlybeusedwithaWindowsXP*,WindowsVista,Windows7,orMacOSX10.0.0
orlateroperatingsystem.
*NOTE:InSP1orolderversionofWindowsX P,ifthemousecursorwillnotmovecorrectly,dothefollowing:
CleartheEnhancepointerprecisioncheckboxunderneaththemousespeedsliderintheMousePropertiesdialogbox[Pointer
Optionstab].
NOTE:ThePAGE and buttonsdonotworkwithPowerPointforMacintosh.
NOTE:Waitatleast5secondsafterdisconnectingthemousereceiverbeforereconnectingitandviceversa.Thecomputermaynot
identifythemousereceiverifitisrepeatedlyconnectedanddisconnectedinrapidintervals.
36
3. Convenient Features
Operating your computer’s mouse from the remote control
Youcanoperateyourcomputer’smousefromtheremotecontrol.
PAGE / Button � scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint on your
computer�
Buttons ���� moves the mouse cursor on your computer�
L-CLICK Button ������ works as the mouse left button�
R-CLICK Button ����� works as the mouse right button�
NOTE:
• Whenyouoperatethecomputerusingthe or button with the menu displayed, both the menu and the mouse pointer
willbeaffected.Closethemenuandperformthemouseoperation.
• ThePAGE and buttonsdonotworkwithPowerPointforMacintosh.
About Drag Mode:
BypressingtheL-CLICKorR-CLICKbuttonfor2or3secondsthenreleasing,thedragmodeissetandthedrag
operationcanbeperformedsimplybypressingthebutton.Todroptheitem,presstheL-CLICK(orR-CLICK)
button.Tocancelit,presstheR-CLICK(orL-CLICK)button.
TIP:YoucanchangethePointerspeedontheMousePropertiesdialogboxontheWindows.Formoreinformation,seetheuser
documentation or online help supplied with your computer.
37
3. Convenient Features
Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion
[CORNERSTONE]
Usethe3DReformfeaturetocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleftorright
sideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.
Cornerstone
1. Pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresetcurrentadjustments.
Current adjustments for [KEYSTONE] or [CORNERSTONE] will be cleared.
2. Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.
3. Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.
Projected image
The drawing shows the up-
per right corner.
4. Pressthe3DREFORMbuttontwice.
The Cornerstone adjustment screen is displayed.
5. Usethebuttontoselectoneicon()whichpointsinthedirectionyouwishtomovetheprojected
imageframe.
6. PresstheENTERbutton.
TIP: If youare adjusting [KEYSTONE], [CORNERSTONE] will not be
available.Ifthishappens,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonfora
minimumof2secondstoresetthe[KEYSTONE]adjustments.
The drawing shows the upper left
icon (
) is selected.
38
3. Convenient Features
7. Usethebuttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.
8. PresstheENTERbutton.
9. Usethebuttontoselectanothericonwhichpointsinthedirection.
OntheCornerstoneadjustmentscreen,select[EXIT]orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The confirmation screen is displayed.
10
.Pressthe or buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
ThiscompletestheCornerstonecorrection.
Selecting[CANCEL]willreturntotheadjustmentscreenwithoutsavingchanges(Step3).
Selecting[RESET]willreturntothefactorydefault.
Selecting[UNDO]willexitwithoutsavingchanges.
NOTE:Toresetthe3DReformcorrectionsettingvalues,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2seconds.
39
3. Convenient Features
Theadjustablerangesfor3DReformareasfollows:
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
CORNERSTONE
Max.+/−35°approx. Max.+/−30°approx.
KEYSTONE
* Thefollowingareconditionsunderwhichthemaximumangleisachieved:
• WhentheNP18ZLlensisused
• Whenthelensshiftissettothecenter
Whenthelensshiftisusedandyettheimageisnotdisplayedinthecenterofthescreen,theadjustablerange
willbeincreasedordecreased.
• Imageisprojectedinmaximumwidewiththezoom
NOTE:
• Evenwhentheprojectoristurnedon,thelastusedcorrectionvaluesareapplied.
• IftheCornerstonescreenisunavailable(grayed),pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoreset
thecurrentcorrectiondata.TheCornerstonefunctionbecomesavailable.
• Turningontheprojectorwillresetthepreviouscorrectionsettingvaluesandcorrectdistortionanewiftheprojectionangleis
changed from the last use.
Iftheprojectionangleisthesameasinthelastuse,thepreviouscorrectionsettingvaluesareretainedinthememory.
• Therangeofkeystonecorrectionisnotthemaximumtiltangleofprojector.
NOTE:Using3DReformcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.
40
3. Convenient Features
Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time
Theprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:PIP
modeandPICTUREBYPICTUREmode.
Fromthemenuyoucanselect[SETUP]→[BASIC]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].
The[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]menuitemhasthefollowingthreeoptions:MODE,POSITION,andSOURCE.
Usetheorbuttontoselect[MODE],[POSITION]or[SOURCE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Selecting the PIP or PICTURE BY PICTURE Mode [MODE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecttwomodes:PIPandSIDEBYSIDE.
Usetheorbuttontoselect[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
PIP:Thisoptionallowsyoutoviewasubpictureinthemainpicture.
Main picture
Sub
picture
PICTUREBYPICTURE:Thisallowsyoutoviewtwopicturessidebyside.
Main picture Sub picture
NOTE:
• Themainpicturewillbedisplayedontheleftsideandthesubpictureontherightside.
• ThemainpicturesignalsupportstheCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,andCOMPUTER3connectors.
ThesubpicturesignalsupportstheVIDEOINandS-VIDEOINconnectors.
• ThemainpicturesupportsanRGBsignalwitharesolutionof1280×1024pixelsorless.
41
3. Convenient Features
ViewingTwoPictures
1. PressthePIPbuttonontheremotecontrol.
ThePIP/PICTUREBYPICTURESOURCEscreenwillbedisplayed.
2. Usethe or buttontoselectthesourceandpresstheENTERbutton.
ThePIPscreenorPICTURE BY PICTUREscreenwillbe displayed,depending onwhichwasselectedinthe
[MODE] setting screen.
3. PressthePIPbuttonagaintoreturntothenormalscreen(singlepicture).
TIP:
• Selectinganothersourcewillreturntothenormalscreen.
• Selectingasourcenotsupportedforthemainpictureorthesubpicturewillreturntothenormalscreen.
[POSITION]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthepositionofasubpictureinthemainpicture.
NOTE:
• Thedefaultsettingis[BOTTOM-RIGHT].
Usetheorbuttontoselectthesubpicture’spositionandpresstheENTERbutton.
Theoptionsare:TOP-LEFT,TOP-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,andBOTTOM-RIGHT.
Thefollowingadjustmentsandsettingsareavailableforthemainpictureonly.
-Adjustingpicture
-Magnifyingapicture
Thefollowingoperationsareavailableforboththemainandsubpictures.
-Picturemute
-Freezingamovingpicture
42
3. Convenient Features
Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]
AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeyword
isset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-
jectorcannotprojectanimage.
•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.
To enable the Security function:
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Pressthebuttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthebuttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BA-
SIC].
3. Pressthebuttontoselect[INSTALLATION(2)].
4. Pressthebuttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
5.Pressthebuttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The[SECURITYKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.
6. TypeinacombinationofthefourbuttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.
The[CONFIRMKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.
NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.
43
3. Convenient Features
7. TypeinthesamecombinationofbuttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
TheSECURITYfunctionhasbeenenabled.
To turn on the projector when [SECURITY] is enabled:
1. PressthePOWERbutton.
The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked.
2. PresstheMENUbutton.
3. TypeinthecorrectkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.Theprojectorwilldisplayanimage.
NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off or unplugging the power cord.
44
3. Convenient Features
To disable the SECURITY function:
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2.Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(2)]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.
TheSECURITYKEYWORDscreenwillbedisplayed.
4. TypeinyourkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.
Whenthecorrectkeywordisentered,theSECURITYfunctionwillbedisabled.
NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequest
code.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConrmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]
is a request code.
45
3. Convenient Features
Storing Changes for Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus [LENS
MEMORY]
TheadjustedvaluescanbestoredinprojectormemorywhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsof
theprojectorortheremotecontrol.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatethe
needtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.Therearetwowaystosaveadjustedvalues
forlensshift,zoom,andfocus.
Functionname Description page
REF.LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluescommontoalltheinputsignals.
Ifnoadjustedvaluesarestoredin[LENSMEMORY],thevaluesstored
in[REF.LENSMEMORY]willbeappliedforlensadjustment.
→page118
LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluesforeachinputsignal.
Usetheadjustedvaluesforthesignalwithadifferentaspectratioor
resolution.Theadjustedvaluescanbeappliedatthetimeofsource
selection.
→page109
NOTE:
• DonotusetheLENSMEMORYfunctiontostorethelensshiftpositiondatawhenusingtheNP16FLlens.Doingsomaycausea
shadow on the screen.
ZoompositiondatacannotbestoredbecausetheNP16FLlensdoesnothaveazoomfunction.
• FortheLensMemoryfunctiontoproduceanalignedimageasaccuratelyaspossible,besuretoperform[CALIBRATION]after
replacement of the lens.
Usage Example
Whenyouwishtodisplayonascreenhavinga4:3aspectratioanNTSCorother4:3aspectratiosignalandan
SXGAorother5:4aspectratiosignal:
Performshift,focus,andzoomadjustmentstosettheverticalscreensizeoftheverticallytall5:4aspectratiosignal
tostandard.
Both4:3aspectratiosignalsand5:4aspectratiosignalscannowbedisplayed.
Notethatwiththeseshift,focus,and zoom adjustments,the4:3aspectratio signal will become smaller onthe
screen.
Toeliminatethissizereduction,adjusttheshift,focusandzoomtotheoptimumconditionforeachofthe4:3aspect
ratiosignalandthe5:4aspectratiosignal.
Memory(storage)ofeachofthesevalueswillpermitprojectionatanoptimumconditionuponsignalswitching.
To store your adjusted values in [REF. LENS MEMORY]:
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Pressthe▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.
3. Pressthe▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION(1)].
46
3. Convenient Features
4. Pressthe▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [REF. LENS MEMORY] screen will be displayed.
5. Select[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
6. Pressthe◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The adjusted values for lens shift, zoom, and focus have been stored in [REF. LENS MEMORY].
7. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be closed.
TIP:
• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.
To call up your adjusted values from [REF. LENS MEMORY]:
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
47
3. Convenient Features
The menu will be displayed.
2. Pressthe▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.
3. Pressthe▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION(1)].
4. Pressthe▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [REF. LENS MEMORY] screen will be displayed.
5. Select[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
6. Pressthe◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The adjusted values will be applied to the current signal. .
7. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be closed.
48
3. Convenient Features
TIP:
Tocalluptheadjustedvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:
1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Pressthe◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The adjusted values stored in [LENS MEMORY] will be applied to the current signal.
Toautomaticallyapplytheadjustedvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:
1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]andpresstheENTERbut-
ton.
2. Pressthevbuttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.
This will move the lens automatically to the position at the time of source selection according to the adjusted val-
ues.
NOTE:TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjusted
valuesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingtheadjustedvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,nelyadjustthe
lens shift, zoom and focus to produce the best possible image.
49
3. Convenient Features
Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser
Overview
TheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:
1. Settingforwired/wirelessnetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)
To use wireless LAN connection, the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit is required. (→ page 164)
To use wired/wireless LAN connection, connect the projector to the computer with a commercially available LAN
cable. (→ page 163)
2. SettingAlertMail(ALERTMAIL)
When the projector is connected to a wired/wireless network, lamp replace time or error messages will be sent via
e-mail.
3. Operatingtheprojector
Power on/off, selecting input, and picture adjustments are possible.
4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORDandAMXBEACON
TwowaysofaccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionareavailable:
• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing
URL:
http://<theprojector’sIPaddress>/index.html
• UseImageExpressUtility2.0containedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].
NOTE:
• Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.
• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournet-
work.
Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedin
rapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-
tor.
• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourweb
browser(orclearthecache).
• Thisdevice
uses“JavaScript”
and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwill
varydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelplesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.
Preparation before Use
ConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page163)
Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthe
settingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeenset
willnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbe
reectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.
50
3. Convenient Features
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser
RegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthepro-
jectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressofthe
projectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecorresponding
totheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”leofthecomputerbeingused.
Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetwork
settingbyspecifying
http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html
fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingby
specifying
http://192.168.73.1/index.html
fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.
ON ������������������������� Power is switched on�
OFF ������������������������ Power is switched off�
VOLUME:Thiscontrolisnotavailableonthismodel.
AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.
PICTURE ���������������� Mutes the video�
PICTURE
����������� Cancels the video muting�
SOUND* ���������������� Mutes the audio�
SOUND*
������������ Cancels the audio muting�
ALL ON ������������������ Mutes each of the video, and audio* functions�
ALL OFF ����������������� Cancels the muting of each of the video, and audio* functions�
NOTE:
* Thesoundmutefunctionisnotavailablebecausetheprojectordoesnothaveanaudiofunction.
51
3. Convenient Features
PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.
BRIGHTNESS ���� Increases the brightness adjustment value�
BRIGHTNESS ���� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�
CONTRAST �������� Increases the contrast adjustment value�
CONTRAST �������� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�
COLOR �������������� Increases the color adjustment value�
COLOR �������������� Decreases the color adjustment value�
HUE ������������������� Increases the hue adjustment value�
HUE ������������������� Decreases the hue adjustment value�
SHARPNESS ����� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�
SHARPNESS ����� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�
• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page
103)
SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputconnectoroftheprojector.
COMPUTER 1 �������� Switches to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector�
COMPUTER 2 �������� Switches to the COMPUTER 2 IN connector�
COMPUTER 3 �������� Switches to the COMPUTER 3 IN connector�
HDMI ��������������������� Switches to the HDMI IN connector�
DisplayPort ������������ Switches to the DisplayPort�
VIDEO �������������������� Switches to the VIDEO IN connector�
S-VIDEO ���������������� Switches to the S-VIDEO IN connector�
VIEWER ����������������� Switches to the data on the USB memory device�
NETWORK ������������� Switches to a LAN signal�
SLOT ���������������������� Switches to the optional board�
PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.
LAMP 1 LIFE REMAINING ��Displays the remaining life of the lamp 1 as a percentage�
LAMP 2 LIFE REMAINING ��Displays the remaining life of the lamp 2 as a percentage�
LAMP 1 HOURS USED ��������Displays how many hours the lamp 1 has been used�
LAMP 2 HOURS USED ��������Displays how many hours the lamp 2 has been used�
FILTER HOURS USED ��������� Displays how many hours the filter has been used�
ERROR STATUS ������������������Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�
LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).
52
3. Convenient Features
NETWORK SETTINGS
•SETTINGS
WIRED or WIRELESS
SETTING SetforwiredLANorforwirelessLAN.
APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLANorwirelessLAN.
DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyour
DHCPserver.
DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetwork
administrator.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
WINS SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen
[DHCP]isturnedon,thisoptionisnotavailable.
AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassignIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtothe
projector.
AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.
Setting for WIRED LAN
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.
DISABLE Tu r noffwiredLANconnection
SettingforWIRELESSLAN(theoptionalWirelessLANUnitrequiredforEurope,Australia,andAsiancoun-
tries)
EASYCONNECTION ExecuteawirelessLANusingEASYCONNECTION.
SIMPLEACCESPOINT Settheprojectorforsimpleaccesspoint.
WPS UseWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetup™)tosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.
NOTE:Usetheprojector’smenustomakeWPSconnectionsandchangetheWPS
prolesettings.
CHANNEL Selectachannel.Availablechannelsvarydependingonthecountryandregion.When
youselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],makesurethattheprojectorandyouraccesspoint
areonthesamechannel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojectorand
yourcomputerareonthesamechannel.
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwirelessLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE
2.
53
3. Convenient Features
SSID Enteran identier(SSID)forwirelessLAN.Communicationcanbedoneonlywith
equipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyourwirelessLAN.
SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.SelectanSSIDwhichyou
canaccess.
NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.
INFRASTRUCTURE:Selectthisoptionwhencommunicatingwithoneormoreequip-
mentconnectedtothewirelessLANnetworkviaawirelessaccesspoint.
ADHOC:SelectthisoptionwhenusingthewirelessLANtodirectlycommunicatewith
acomputerinpeer-to-peermode.
SECURITYTYPE
Tur nonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmission.Whenturnontheencryp-
tionmode,setWEPkeyorencryptedkey.
DISABLE Willnotturnontheencryptionfeature.Yourcommunicationsmay
bemonitoredbysomeone.
WEP64bit Uses64-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.
WEP128bit Uses128-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.Thisoptionwill
increaseprivacyandsecurity when compared to use of 64-bit
datalengthencryption.
WPA-PSKTKIP/WPA-PSKAES/
WPA2-PSKTKIP/WPA2-PSKAES/
WPA-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/
WPA-EAPAESEAP-TLS/
WPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA2-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/
WPA2-EAPAESEAP-TLS/
WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2
Theseoptionsparovidestrongersecurity
thanWEP.
NOTE:
• TheWEPsettingsmustbethesameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointin
your wireless network.
• WhenyouuseWEP,yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslowdown.
• OtherencryptionkeysthanWEP64bitandWEP128bitarenotavailablewhen[ADHOC]is
selectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].
• Toinstalladigitalcerticate,usetheprojector’smenu.(→ page 138)
INDEX Selectencryptionkeywhenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit]in[SECURITY
TYPE].
KEY Whenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit]in[SECURITYTYPE]:
EnterWEPkey.
Select Characters(ASCII) Hexadecimaldigit(HEX)
WEP64bit Upto5characters Upto10characters
WEP128bit Upto13characters Upto26characters
When selecting [WPA PSK-TKIP], [WPA PSK-AES], [WPA2 PSK-TKIP] or [WPA2
PSK-AES]:
Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.
USERNAME SetausernameforWPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP.
PASSWORD SetapasswordforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAP
v2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2.
USEDIGITALCERTIFI-
CATE
SelectthisifyouuseadigitalcerticateforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-
EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAES
PEAP-MSCHAPv2.
54
3. Convenient Features
•NAME
PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorsothatyourcomputercanidentifytheprojector.A
projectornamemustbe16charactersorless.
TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe
15orless.
DOMAINNAME Enterthedomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainname
mustbe60charactersorless.
•ALERTMAIL
ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mail
whenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.
PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.
ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.
Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:
Thelampandltersareattheendofitsusablelife.Pleasereplacethelampand
lters.
ProjectorName:XXXXX
Lamp1HoursUsed:XXX[H]
Lamp2HoursUsed:XXX[H]
SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.
SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.
RECIPIENT’SADDRESS
1,2,3
Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.
TESTMAIL
Sendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornot
NOTE:
• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork
settings are correct.
• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthis
happen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.
SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.
55
3. Convenient Features
•NETWORKSERVICE
PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforget
yourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.
HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.
AMXBEACON Tur nonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetwork
supportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.
TIP:
WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrec-
ognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.
PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.
ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.
NOTE: If you forget your password, contact your dealer.
*WhatisPJLink?
PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardproto-
colisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.
TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.
SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
•CRESTRON
DISABLE DisablesCrestronControl™.
ENABLE EnablesCrestronControl.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCrestronserver.
IPID SetyourIPIDofCrestronserver.
•INFORMATION
WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.
WIRELESSLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwirelessLANconnection.
UPDATE Reectsettingswhentheyarechanged.
TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCrestronRoomView.
Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com
56
3. Convenient Features
Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the
Projector via a Network [NETWORK PROJECTOR]
ByselectingtheprojectorconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatofyourPC,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojected
tothescreenvianetwork.Thereisnoneedofconnectionusingthecomputercable(VGA).
Operation Environment
ApplicableOS Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaHomePremium
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
Hardwarespecications ThespecicationsrecommendedbyMicrosoftastheoperationenvironmentfor
Windows7/WindowsVistashouldbesatised.
NetworkEnvironment WiredLANorwirelessLANenvironmentthatsupportsTCP/IPisrequired.
Screencolor HighColor(16bits)
TrueColor(24bitsand32bits)
*Settingwith256colorsorlessisnotavailable.
SettingtheProjectortoNetworkProjectorInputMode
1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.
The input selection window appears.
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The
APPLICATIONMENUscreenwillbedisplayed.Gotostep3.
57
3. Convenient Features
2. Pressthe or buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Inthescreen,the[APPLICATIONMENU]menuisdisplayed.
3. Fromthe[APPLICATIONMENU]menu,select[NETWORKPROJECTOR].
The[PROJECTORNAME/DISPLAYRESOLUTION/PASSWORD/URL]willbedisplayed.
58
3. Convenient Features
ProjectingtheImagewithNetworkProjector
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[AllPrograms].
3. Click[Accessories].
4. Click[ConnecttoaNetworkProjector].
When the [Permission Connect to a Network Projector] window appears, click [Yes.].
The “Connect to a Network Projector” window appears.
5. Click[→Searchforaprojector(recommended)].
Inthe“Availableprojectors”box,“PX750USeries”isdisplayed.
6. Click[PX750USeries].
The message “Enter the password for the projector that you selected.” is displayed at the bottom of the window.
59
3. Convenient Features
7. Inputthepasswordtothepasswordinputboxdisplayedbytheoperationatstep3onpage57.
8. Click[Connect].
The network projector function works and the screen of Windows 7 is projected from the projector.
• Iftheresolutionofyourcomputer’sscreenisdifferentfromtheprojector’sscreenresolution,theNETWORK
PROJECTORfunctionmaynotwork.Ifthishappens,changetheresolutionofthecomputer’sscreentolower
resolution than the one displayed at Step 3 on page 57.
NOTE:Whenthenetworkprojectorfunctionworks,thebackgroundcolorofthedesktopchangestoblack.Whenthenetwork
projector function is stopped, the original background color is restored.
Reference:IftheprojectorcannotbefoundatStep5,click[→Entertheprojectoraddress].Then,inputthe“Networkaddress”
(Inputexample:http://10.32.97.61/lan)and“Projectorpassword”(Inputexample:82291627)displayedinthescreenprojected
from the projector.
ExitingtheNetworkProjectorOperation
1. Click[Projecting:PX750USeries]intheWindowsVistataskbar.
2. Click[Disconnect].
The Network Projector function is stopped.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.
60
3. Convenient Features
Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer via a Network
[REMOTE DESKTOP]
• ByselectingthePCconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatoftheprojector,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojected
tothescreenvianetwork.
Then,byoperatingthekeyboard,youcanoperateWindows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPonthePCconnected
withthenetwork.
• WiththeRemoteDesktopfunction,youcanremotelyoperatethePCplacedatadistancefromtheprojector.
Meetingroom
Ofce
NOTE:
• The[REMOTEDESKTOP]functionwillworkonthefollowingWindowseditions.
Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
WindowsXPProfessionalwithServicePack3
(Note)
• Inthisuser’smanualthisfeatureisdescribedusingWindows7asanexample,butWindowsVistaandWindowsXPProfessional
ServicePack2orlaterwillalsoworkwiththisfeature.
• AkeyboardisrequiredtousetheRemoteDesktopfunction.
• TheRemoteDesktopfunctioncanbeoperatedwithakeyboard.Usingawirelessmousewithawirelesskeyboardismoreuseful
for operating.
Useacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard,awirelessmouse,andaUSBwirelessreceiver.
UseacommerciallyavailableUSBkeyboardandUSBmouse.
• AUSBkeyboardwithabuilt-inUSBhubcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.
• AwirelesskeyboardormousethatsupportsBluetoothcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.
• WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBdevicesinthemarket.
61
3. Convenient Features
Prepareacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard(USlayoutversion).
ConnecttheUSBwirelessreceivertotheUSBport(TypeA)oftheprojector.Makeallnecessarysettingsforyour
wirelesskeyboardandmouse.
62
3. Convenient Features
Setting the password to the user account of Windows 7
TIP:Ifapasswordhasbeensetforanaccount,thesteps1to9canbeskipped.
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[Addorremoveuseraccounts]displayedunder[UserAccounts].
4. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]conrmationwindowappears,click[Continue].
5. Click[Administrator].
6. Click[Createapassword].
7. Inputthepasswordtothe[Newpassword]box.
8. InputthesamepasswordasthatatStep7tothe[Conrmnewpassword]box.
9. Click[Createapassword].
The Administrator is changed to [Password Protection].
Setting the Remote Access
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[SystemandSecurity].
4. Click[Allowremoteaccess]displayedunder[System].
5. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]conrmationwindowappears,click[Continue].
The [System Properties] window appears.
6. Click[AllowconnectionsfromcomputersrunninganyversionofRemoteDesktop(lesssecure)]inthe
RemoteDesktopboxandclick[OK].
CheckingtheIPaddressonWindows7
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[Viewnetworkstatusandtasks]displayedunder[NetworkandInternet].
63
3. Convenient Features
4. Click[Viewstatus]displayedinblueontherightof[LocalAreaConnection]inthewindow.
The [Local Area Connection Status] window appears.
5. Click[Details...].
Writedownthevaluefor“IPv4IPAddress”(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)displayed.
6. Click[Close].
7. Click[X]attheupperrightofthewindow.
The system goes back to the desktop.
StartingtheRemoteDesktop
1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.
The input selection window appears.
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The
NETWORKscreenwillbedisplayed.Gotostep3.
64
3. Convenient Features
2. Pressthe or buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [NETWORK] menu will be displayed.
3. Fromthe[NETWORK]menu,usethewirelesskeyboardtoselect[REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION].
The[REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION]windowappears.
4. OperatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheIPaddressofWindows7andclick“Connect”.
The log-on screen of Windows 7 is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.
5. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheuser’spasswordandpress“Enter”.
The remote desktop function is started.
Windows 7 desktop is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.
Log out the computer.
Use the wireless keyboard connected to the projector to operate Windows 7.
NOTE:Whentheprojection ismadewiththeremotedesktop function,thebackgroundcolorofthe desktopischangedto
black.
65
3. Convenient Features
ExitingtheRemoteDesktop
1. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoclick[Start]fromthedesktopscreenprojectedbytheprojector.
2. Click[X]ontherightofthestartmenu.
The remote desktop function is stopped.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.
TIP:
Setting[OPTIONS]inREMOTEDESKTOP
Clicking[OPTIONS]displaysthe[PERFORMANCE]screen.
Makingsettingsto[OPTIONS]willallowyoutodisplaythedesktopbackground,ortoenablethewindowanimationfunctionduring
theRemoteDesktopoperation.However,doingthiswillcausethedisplay’sormouse’sresponsetoslowdown.
Ifthedisplay’sormouse’sresponseissloweddown,tryoneormoreofthefollowing:
DESKTOPBACKGROUND:Clearthecheckmarktodisplaythedesktopbackgroundinmonochrome.
MENUANDWINDOWANIMATION:Clearthecheckmarktodisablemenuandwindowanimation.
THEMES:ClearthecheckmarknottouseThemes.
SHOWCONTENTSOFWINDOWWHILEDRAGGING:Clearthecheckmarktoshowonlythewindowpanewhile
dragging.
66
4. Using the Viewer
❶ What you can do with the Viewer
TheViewerfeatureallowsyoutoviewslidesormovielesstoredonaUSBmemoryontheprojector,orashared
folderinacomputerconnectedtothenetwork.
TheViewerhasthefollowingfeatures.
• WhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmemorythatstoresimagelesisinsertedintotheUSBport(TypeA)ofthe
projector,theViewerallowsyoutoviewtheimagelesontheUSBmemory.
Evenifnocomputerisavailable,presentationscanbeconductedsimplywiththeprojector.
• Movielecanbeplayedback.
• AMicrosoftPowerPointleorAdobePDFlecanbesimplyprojectedonthescreenwithoutconnectingacom-
puter.
• Imageandmovielesstoredinasharedfolderinacomputerconnectedtoanetworkcanbeprojected.
Thecomputerwith“MediaSharing”ofWindowsMediaPlayer11turnedoncanbeusedasamediaserver.
Supported graphic formats
Format Filenameextension
JPEG .jpg,.jpe,.jpeg(CMYKisnotsupported.)
BMP .bmp(biteldnotsupported)
PNG .png(InterlacedPNGandαchannelPNGarenotsupported.)
GIF .gif(InterlacedGIF,transparationGIF,andanimationGIFarenotsupported.)
*Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon
willbedisplayed.
NOTE:
Maximumnumberofpixelsofimagewhichcanbedisplayedare:
• ProgressiveJPEG:1280×1280
• GIF:1280×1280
• Others:4000×4000
• Somelessupportedbytheaboverequirementsmaynotbedisplayed.
Supported movie files
Filenameextension Videocompression/expansionmethod Audiocompression/expansionmethod
.mpg,.mpeg. MPEG2 MPEGAudioLayer2
MPEGAudioLayer3
.wmv VC-1/WMV9 WMA9Standard
.mp4 H.264/AVC AAC-LC
Playbackrequirements:
Resolution:320×240to1280×720
Videoframerate:upto30fps
Bitrate:upto15Mbps
Max.lesize:upto2GB
NOTE:
• Somelessupportedbytheaboverequirementsmaynotbeplayedback.
Whenasupportedmovieleisplayedback,itsaudiowillnotbeoutputfromtheprojector.
67
4. Using the Viewer
NOTE:
• Movielesconvertedbyusingthevideo/audioformatwhichisnotsupportedbythisprojectorcannotbeplayedback.
In this case, there will be no icon to show that playback is not possible.
• FileswithDigitalRightsManagement(DRM)protectioncannotbeplayedback.
• Someofthemovielesthatmeettheaboverequirementsmaynotbeplayedback.
• WMVformatvideolewillbedisplayedinanaspectratioof1to1independentlyofitsoriginalaspectratio.
• Filesthatcanbeplayedbackonthemediaserveraregraphicsandmovieles.InWindowsMediaPlayer11(WindowsXP/
WindowsVista)mp4lescannotbeplayedback.
Supported PDF files
Filenameextension Supportedleformat
.pdf AdobeAcrobatPDF
NOTE:
• FontsnotembeddedinPDFlemaynotbedisplayed
• FunctionsaddedtoPDFleaftercreatedwillnotworkordisplay.Functionsaddedarebookmarks,boxesinformtool,andnotes
will not be displayed.
AutoiporAutotransitionwillnotwork.
• SomePDFlesmaynotbedisplayed.
Supported PowerPoint files
Filenameextension Supportedleformat
.ppt MicrosoftPowerPoint97–2003
NOTE:
• Playablefonts,colors,fontornament,placement,objectinsertionoranimationarerestricted.
• SomeMicrosoftPowerPoint97–2003lesmaynotbedisplayed.
Supported USB memory devices
- BesuretouseaUSBmemorydeviceformattedwiththeFAT,exFAT,FAT32orFAT16lesystem.
TheprojectordoesnotsupportNTFSformattedUSBmemory.
IftheprojectordoesnotrecognizeyourUSBmemory,checkiftheformatissupported.
ToformatyourUSBmemoryinyourcomputer,refertothedocumentorhelplethatcomeswithyourWin-
dows.
- WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBmemoriesinthemarket.
- Waitatleast5secondsafterdisconnectingaUSBmemorydevicebeforereconnectingitandviceversa.
TheprojectormaynotidentifytheUSBmemorydeviceifitisrepeatedlyconnectedanddisconnectedinrapid
intervals.
68
4. Using the Viewer
Notices on shared folder and media server
• Filesfromasharedfolderormediaservermaynotbeprojectedifsecurityorantivirussoftwareisinstalledonyour
computer.
• Openthefollowingrewallports:
- Mediaserver
Portnumber Protocol
1900 UDP
2869 TCP
10243 TCP
10280-10284 UDP
- Sharedfolder
Portnumber Protocol
137 UDP/TCP
138 UDP/TCP
139 UDP/TCP
445 UDP/TCP
• Setyourcomputerforsharingandsecuritytograntaccesstolesinthesharedfolderandsetyoursecurityor
antivirussoftwaretograntaccesstolesinthesharedfolder.Consultyournetworkadministratorformoreinforma-
tion.
• Movielesinthesharedfolderorthemediaservermaynotbeplayedbackcorrectlydependingonyournetwork
environmentorthebitrateofyourle.
NOTE:
DonotdisconnectbetweentheprojectorandyourcomputerbyremovingtheLANcableorturningofftheprojectorwhenaPow-
erPointleorPDFleisdisplayedfromasharedfolder.
DoingsowillmakeViewerinoperable.
NOTE:
• ThefollowingoperationsbyusingthebuttonsontheprojectorarenotpossiblewhentheVIEWERscreensuchastheslidescreen
and the thumbnail screen is displayed.
- AutoAdjustmentbyusingtheAUTOADJ.button
• FreezingpicturebyusingtheFREEZE,ASPECT,orAUTOADJ.buttonontheremotecontrolisnotpossiblewhentheVIEWER
screen such as the slide screen and the thumbnail screen is displayed.
• Executing[RESET]→[ALLDATA]fromthemenuwillreturnthesettingsfortheViewertoolbartothefactorydefault.
69
4. Using the Viewer
❷ Preparing presentation materials
1. Createyourpresentationmaterialsandsavetheminasupportedleformattoyourcomputer.
• Seepage91 for supported file formats.
• MakesurethatPowerPointleisdisplayedontheViewerbeforegivingyourrealpresentation.
With Viewer PPT Converter 3.0, you can convert your PowerPoint files to index files that can be displayed on
the Viewer. Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 can be downloaded from our website.
• WhencreatingaPDFle,embedyourfontsinyourPDFle.EmbeddingfontsrequiresAdobeAcrobat.This
cannot be done in Adobe Reader.
TIP:
•UsingPrintCommand
ExampleforfontembeddingusingPrintCommand.SeethehelpofAdobeAcrobatformoreinformation.
1. Select“Print”fromthe“File”menu.
2. Select“AdobePDF”from“Printername”andclickthe“Properties”but-
ton.
3. Clickthe“Edit”buttoninthe“AdobePDFSettings”tab.
4. ClickthefonttabintheEditwindowtoselectthefontembedwindow.
5. Placeacheckmarkfor“Embedallfonts”.
Click “OK” to return to the Print window, and click “OK” to start creating a
PDF file.
2. Savealetoyourdrive.
To save a file to your USB memory:
Use the Windows Explore to copy the file to your USB memory.
To place a file in a shared folder you create in your computer, see page 82.
To use “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 11, see page 86.
70
4. Using the Viewer
❸ Projecting images stored in a USB memory device
ThissectionexplainsthebasicoperationoftheViewer.
TheexplanationprovidestheoperationalprocedurewhentheViewertoolbarissettothefactorydefault.
Preparation:BeforestartingtheViewer,storeimagestotheUSBmemoryusingyourcomputer.
Starting the Viewer
1. Turnontheprojector.(→page16)
2. InserttheUSBmemoryintotheUSBportoftheprojec-
tor.
NOTE:
• DonotremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwhileit’sLED
ashes.Doingsomaycorruptthedata.
TIP:
YoucanaUSBmemoryinserttheprojectorwhenthedrivelistscreen
is displayed.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselect[VIEWER].
A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select
screen.
A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display the
drive list screen.
Anotherwaytoselect[VIEWER]istopresstheVIEWER
button on the remote control.
TIP:
• Formoreinformationaboutthedrivelistscreen,seepage74.
• Todisplaygraphicsinasharedfolder,seepage82; to display still
imagesormovielesinamediaserver,seepage86.
71
4. Using the Viewer
4. Press the ▶ button to select“USB1” and press the
ENTERbutton.
The “USB1” thumbnail screen will be displayed.
TIP:
• Formoreinformationaboutthumbnailscreen,seepage76.
5. Usethe▲▼◀ or ▶buttontoselectanicon.
• The→ (arrow) symbol on the right indicates there are
morepages.pressingthePAG E ▽ (page down) button
willshowthenextpage:pressingthePAG E △ (page up)
will show the previous page.
6. PresstheENTERbutton.
Operation varies depending on the selected file.
•Stillimage
The selected slide will be displayed.
The ◀ or ▶ button can be used to select the next (right)
slide or the previous (left) slide in the thumbnail screen.
• PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythecontrolbar
with which is used to select or rotate an slide.(→ page
77)
72
4. Using the Viewer
•Moviele
The movie file will start playing.
After finishing the playback, the screen will turn to black.
PresstheEXITbuttontoreturntothethumbnailscreen.
• Pressing the ENTER button will display the movie’s
control bar with which you can pause or fastforward and
some other operations.
•MicrosoftPowerPointle
The slide on the first page will be displayed.
Press ▶ to select the next slide; press ◀ to select the previ-
ous slide.
• Youcanalsousethe▼ or ▲ button to select a page. To
returntothethumbnailscreen,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
• Files withslideshow or animation effectsmay not be correctly
displayedontheViewer.
See“SupportedPowerPointles”onpage67, 91.
•AdobePDFle
The first page will be displayed.
• ThePDFlewillllthewidthofthescreen.
Pressing the ▼ or ▲ button will scroll the screen down or
up.
ThePAG E▽orPAG E △ button will move the screen one
page down or up.
To returntothethumbnailscreen,presstheEXITbutton.
• Whenapassowordinputwindowisdisplayed,itmeans
that the PDF file is password-protected.
Pressing the ENTER button will show the software
keyboard. Use the software keyboard to enter your
password.
Select [OK] and press the ENTER button. The PDF file
will be displayed.
• Formoreinformationonthesoftwarekeyboard,seepage
144.
NOTE:
BookmarksandnotesthatwereaddedafterPDFconversionwillnot
be displayed.
IffontswerenotembeddedatthetimeofPDFconversion,thosefonts
will not be displayed.
TIP:
Ittakessometime(about30secondstotwominutes)todisplaya
largesizeleortoturnpagesofaPDFlethathasmanypages.
73
4. Using the Viewer
•Indexle(extension:.idx)
• Index les, which is converted by usingViewer PPT
Converter 3.0, will appear in the Thumbnail screen.
Only folders and JPEG files converted by using
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will appear in the Thumbnail
screen.
• Toselectslideshowofindexles,openthe[PRESENTA-
TION]folderintheDRIVELISTscreen.
However, index files will not appear. Only folders and
JPEGleswillappear.
• UptofourindexfoldersinyourUSBandsharedfolder
are displayed. The four folders will be displayed in reverse
chronological order
• WhenyouinserttheUSBmemorydevicestoringindex
with the Viewer in operation, the content of the index files
will be displayed.
NOTE:
• Theplaymode(MANUAL/AUTO)forslidesofindexleworksin
the following way:
Incaseof[MANUAL]for[PLAYMODE]
Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]
→[MANUAL],indexleswillbesetformanualplaybackinregard-
lessofwhether[INTERVAL]isset.
Incaseof[AUTO]selectedfor[PLAYMODE]
Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]
→ [AUTO],index les willbe set forauto playback atintervals
speciedbyusing[INTERVAL].
When,however,[-1]isselectedfor[INTERVAL],theplaymodewill
besetforautoplaybackaccordingtothesettingfor[OPTIONS]→
[SLIDESETTING]→[INTERVAL].
7. RemovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojector.
Return to the drive list screen. Make sure that the LED on
the USB memory is not flashing before removing the USB
memory.
NOTE:IfyouremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwithaslide
displayed, the projector may not operate correctly. If this happens,
turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch, and unplug the
powercord.Wait3minutes,thenconnectthe
powercord,
turnon
the main power switch, and turn on the projector.
Exiting the Viewer
1. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselectasourceotherthan
[VIEWER].
A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select
screen.
A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display
another source.
• To exit theViewer using the remote control, select a
sourceotherthan[VIEWER].
XXXX Motors
74
4. Using the Viewer
Names and functions of Viewer screen
TheViewerhasthreescreens:Drivelistscreen,Thumbnailscreen,andSlidescreen.
•Drivelistscreen
Displaysalistofdrivesconnectedtotheprojector.
Menu operation
• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton
todisplaythesubmenu.
Operation for Drive list screen
1. Pressthe▶buttontomovethecursortothedrivelist.
(Use the ◀ or ▶ button to switch between the menu and the drive list.)
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select a type of drive; press the ◀ or ▶ button to select the drive connected to the
projector.
2. SelectthedriveandpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtothethumbnailscreenoftheselecteddrive.
Cursor (yellow)
Cursor (yellow)
Menu Menu
Scroll bar
[Drive list screen] [Thumbnail screen]
Folder icon
Path information
Drive information/File information
Menu guide
Operation button guide
Control bar
* The operation for still image differs from that for movie.
[Slide screen]
75
4. Using the Viewer
Functions
Name Description
REFRESH Displaysadditionalmediaserversinthedrivelistscreen.
OPTIONS OpenstheOPTIONSmenu.
SLIDESETTING Setsupslides.(→page79)
MOVIESETTING Setsupmovieles.(→page80)
AUTOPLAYSETTING Setsupautoplay.(→page80)
SHAREEDFOLDER Setsupasharedfolder.(→page82)
MEDIASERVER Setsupamediaserver.(→page86)
RETURN ClosestheOPTIONSmenu.
SYSTEMSETTING Switchestothesystemsettingmenu.SeewiredLAN,wirelessLAN,WPS,
network information, mouse,andkeyboardin“9. ApplicationMenu”. (→
page131)
USB Displays the icon for aUSB memoryinserted into the USB port of the
projector.
SHAREDFOLDER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-
nectingasharedfolder).
*Seepage82forsettingupforconnectingasharedfoleroftheprojector.
MEDIASERVER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-
nectingamediaserver).
*Seepage86forsettingupforconnectingamediaserveroftheprojector
PRESENTATION DisplaystheiconwhenaUSBmemoryorsharedfolerstoresindexles.
Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorle.
Driveinformation [Example]
USB1 314MBFREE/492MB
Displaysthedrive. Displaysfreespaceandcapcityof
adrive.(USBonly)
Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.
Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.
*Itisdisplayedinthree-digitnumber(roundingup)
NOTE:
WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistscreenorthumbnailscreenisnotdisplayed.Todisplayit,selectthe[RETURN]
iconandpresstheENTERbutton.
76
4. Using the Viewer
•Thumbnailscreen
Displaysalistoffolders,thumbnails,andiconsinthedriveselectedonthedrivelistscreen.
Menu operation
• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton
todisplaythemenuorsettingscreen.
Operation for Thumbnail screen
1. Press the ▶ button to move the cursor to the thumbnail screen when the OPTIONS menu is not dis-
played.
2. Pressthe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselectaleorfolder.
3. PresstheENTERbuttontostartslideshoworplaybackoftheselectedle.Selectingafolderwilldisplay
itsthumbnailscreen.
Functions
Name Description
UP Goestooneupperlevelmenu.
THUMBNAIL Switchestwodisplaysbetweenthumbnailandicon.
SORTSETTING Rearrangesfoldersorles.
DRIVELIST Returnstothedrivelistscreen.
OPTIONS ChangestotheOPTIONSmenu.
SYSTEMSET-
TING
Opensthesystemsettingmenu.
Scrollbar Thumbnailscreenwilldisplay12leswith4by3.Ifthethumbnailscreenhastwelveor
morelesorfolders,thescrollbarwillbedisplayedattherightside.UsingthePAGE
▽ or PAGE △ button will scroll the whole screen down or up.
Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorle.
Thumbnailinformation [Example]
005.jpg 5/200 11/03/201013:25:12 502KB
Selectedfolder
nameorle
name
Numbersandorderof
lesinafolder(only
whenfolderselected)
Create/Changedate:
M/D/Y/H/M/B
Displaysle
capacity
Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.
Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.
TIP:
• Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon[?]willbedisplayed,
• Themaximumdisplayablenumberofimagesis300inthethumbnailscreenincludingthenumberoffolders.
• Ifalenameorpathofafolderislongerthanspecied,itwillbedisplayedwithcentercharactersorpathskipped.
Example:“123456789.jpg”willbedisplayedin“123..789.jpg”.
77
4. Using the Viewer
•Slidescreen(stillimage/movie)
Playsaleselectedfromalistofthumbnailsoricons.
• ForoperatingaMicrosoftPowerPointleandAdobePDFle,seepage72.
Control bar operation
• Thecontrolbarwillbedisplayedonlywhenastillimage(orindexle)andamovieleisselected.
• Thecontrolbarforstillimagesdiffersfromthatformovieles.
1. PressingtheENTERbuttoninSlidescreenwilldisplaythecontrolbaratthebottomofthescreen.
2. Usethe◀ or ▶buttontoselectaleandpresstheENTERbutton.
• Theselectedfunctionwillbeexecuted.
Functions of still image control bar
Name Description
PREV Goesbacktothepreviousimage
PLAY Playstheimage.Thisbuttonalsoisusedtostoporstartplayinganimage.
NEXT Goestothenextimage.
RIGHT Rotatestheimage90°clockwise.
• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.
LEFT Rotatestheimage90°counterclockwise.
• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.
SIZE
BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithits aspectratiointheprojector’sdisplayable
maximumresolution.
ACTUAL
SIZE
Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.
• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.
END Stops playingslidesorslideshow, and closes the control bar to returntothethumbnail
screen.
78
4. Using the Viewer
Functions of movie control bar
Name Description
PREV Goesbacktothebeginningofamoviele.
• Goesbacktothebeginningofthepreviousmovieleifexecutedimmediatelyafterbeing
startedplaying.
FR Fast-rewindsamovieleforabout7seconds.
PLAY/PAUSE
PLAY Playsamoviele.
PAUSE Stopsplayingamoviele.
FF Fast-forwardsamovieleforabout7seconds.
NEXT Goestothebeginningofanextmoviele.
TIME Displaysanelapsedtimeforplaybackorpause.
SIZE
BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplayable
maximumresolution.
ACTUAL
SIZE
Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.
• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.
END Stopsplayingamovie,andclosesthecontrolbartoreturntothethumbnailscreen.
79
4. Using the Viewer
Viewer option settings
•SLIDESETTING
Setsstillimagesorslides.
Name Options Description
SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-
ablemaximumresolution.
ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
PLAYMODE MANUAL Selectsmanualplay.
AUTO Selectsautoplay.
INTERVAL 5-300seconds Specifies interval time when [AUTO] is selected for PLAY
MODE.
REPEAT Checkmark Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.
TIP
• Toplayoneormoreslides,placethoselesintoafolder.
80
4. Using the Viewer
•MOVIESETTING
Setsthefunctionsforamoviele.
Name Options Description
SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-
ablemaximumresolution.
ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
REPEAT OFF Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.
ONEREPEAT Repeatsoneleonly.
ALLREPEAT Repeatsalllesinthecurrentfolder.
TIP
• Turningon[REPEAT]willdisplayblackscreenduringintermissionbetweenmovies.
•AUTOPLAYSETTING
SetsautoplayforslideshowwhenaUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheUSBportoftheprojector,orwhen
[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
Name Options Description
AUTOPLAY OFF —
PICTURE Playstherststillimagefoundinadrive.
MOVIE Playstherstmoviefoundinadrive.
PowerPoint PlaystherstPowerPointlefoundinadrive.
TIP
• AutoplaybehaviorisdifferentbetweenwhenaUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheUSBportoftheprojectorandwhen
[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
• AutoplaystartsfortherstfoundlesupportingtheletypesetupforAutoPlay.Thelewillbesearchedinthedriverootor
lowerlevel.
• When[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE],thelastselectedlewillbeautomaticallyplayedifitisfound,orthelastselectedfolder
willbesearchedandtherstfoundlewillbeautomaticallyplayed.
ToautomaticallyplayamovieleinaUSBmemory,storeonemovieleorchangeitslenamesothatitcanbesearchedrst.
81
4. Using the Viewer
•SORTSETTING
Setstheorderofdisplayingthumbnailsorslides.
Name Options Description
SORT NAME(ABC..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybynameinascendingorder.
NAME(ZYX..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybynameindescendingorder.
EXT.(ABC..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybyextensioninascendingor-
der.
EXT.(ZYX..) Displays the les alphabetically byextension in descending
order.
DAT E(NEW) Displaysthelesinreversechronologicalorder.
DAT E(OLD) Displaysthelesinchronologicalorder.
SIZE(BIG) Displaysthelesindescendingorderofitslesize.
SIZE(SMALL) Displaysthelesinascendingorderofitslesize.
82
4. Using the Viewer
❹ Projecting data from shared folder
LAN
Shared folder
Wireless LAN
Projector
Shared folder
Preparation
Forprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.
Forcomputer:Placelestobeprojectedinasharedfolderandnotethefolder’spath.Memorizeorwritedownthe
pathforlateruse.
• Forsharingafolder,refertoyouruserguideorhelpleaccompaniedwithyourWindowscomputer.
• Useakeyboardtogiveanametothesharedfolderinalphanumericcharacters.
• Toconnectthesharedfolderbeyondthesubnet,set[WINSCONFIGURATION]in[NETWORKSETTINGS]from
themenu.
• Digitalsignature(SMBsignature)isnotsupported.
Connecting the projector to the shared folder
1. PresstheVIEWERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The drive list window will be displayed.
• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→ page
20)
83
4. Using the Viewer
2. Displaysthe[OPTIONS]menu.
Press the ▼ button to select the
(OPTIONS)iconandpresstheENTERbutton.
• WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistwillnotbedisplayed.
3. Displaythe[SHAREDFOLDERSETTING]screen.
Press the ▼buttontoselectthe(SHAREDFOLDERSETTING)iconandpresstheENTERbutton.
4. Selectafoldernumberandplacetoenableit.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button to a shared folder number and press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] , and then press
the ENTER button.
5. Enterthepath,username,andpasswordforthesharedfolder.
Press the ▼ button to select the [SHARED FOLDER] field. The software keyboard will be displayed.
For using the software keyboard, see page 144.
• Ifyourcomputerisnotpasswordprotected,enteringapasswordisnotrequired.
• Uptofoursharedfolderscanbeadded.
• Themaximumlengthofapathofthesharedfoldermustbe15alphanumericcharactersforcomputernameand
23 alphanumeric characters for folder name.
84
4. Using the Viewer
6. Exitthesetting.
Press the ▼ button to select [OK] and press the ENTER button.
This will close the [SHARED FOLDER] screen.
• Ifanerrormessageappear,yoursettingsarenotcorrect.Tr y again.
85
4. Using the Viewer
Disconnecting the shared folder from the projector
• Disablethenumberofasharedfolderyouwishtodisconnect
Press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] and press the ENTER button to clear it.
NOTE:
• WhenaPowerPointleorPDFleisdisplayed,donotdisconnectyourLANcable.Ifdoingso,theViewerwillnotwork.
TIP:
• ConnectingsettingsforSharedfolder
Settingsofuptofourfolderscanbesaved.
Restartingtheprojectorwilldisplaysetting-savedsharedfoldersingreyfoldericononthedrivelistscreen.
Selectingthegreyiconfolderwillskipentryforafolderpath.
• Failingtoconnectwithasharedfolderwilldisplaythefoldericonwith“x”mark.Ifthishappen,checkyourfoldersetting.
86
4. Using the Viewer
❺ Projecting data from media server
LAN
Media server
Media server
Wireless LAN
Media server
Projector
Preparation
Forprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.
Forcomputer:Prepareimagelesormovielestobeprojected,andsetup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer
11orWindowsMediaPlayer12.
NOTE:
• Boththeprojectorandthemediaservermustbeonthesamesubnet.Connectingtothemediaserverbeyondthesubnetisnot
possible.
• TypesofimagesandmovieswhichcanbesharedmayvarydependingonWindowsversion.
Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 11
1. StartWindowsMediaPlayer11.
2. Select“MediaSharing”from“Library”.
The “Media Sharing” dialog box will be displayed.
87
4. Using the Viewer
3. Select“Sharemymedia”checkbox,andthenselectOK.
A list of accessible devices will be displayed.
4. Select“PX750USeries”andthen“Allow”.
A check mark will be added to the “PX750U Series” icon.
• The“PX750USeries”isaprojectornamespeciedin[NETWORKSETTINGS].
5. Select“OK”.
This will make pictures and video in “Library” available from the projector.
88
4. Using the Viewer
Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 12
1. StartWindowsMediaPlayer12.
2. Select“Stream”,andthenselect“Automaticallyallowdevicestoplaymymedia”.
The “Allow All Media Devices” windows will be displayed.
3. Select“Automaticallyallowallcomputersandmediadevices”.
Graphicsandmovielesin“Library”canbeusedfromtheprojector.
89
4. Using the Viewer
Connecting the projector to the media server
PresstheVIEWERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
TheVIEWERwillstart.
• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→page
20)
• Thiswillstartsearchingforacomputerwith“mediasharing”enabledinthenetworkandaddittothe“Mediaserver”
ofthethumbnailscreen.
Anotherwaytodothisistopointthecursorto“Mediaserver”andselect[REFRESH]fromthethumbnailmenu
andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE:
• Uptofouraccessiblemediaserverscanbeautomaticallysearchedanddisplayed.Thefthdeviceorlatercannotbedisplayed.
(→page70)
90
4. Using the Viewer
Disconnecting the projector from the media server
1. DisplaytheOPTIONSmenu.
Press the ▼buttontoselectthe[OPTIONS]iconandselecttheENTERbutton.
2. DisplaytheMEDIASERVERsettingscreen.
Press the ▼buttontoselecttheMEDIASERVERiconandpresstheENTERbutton.
3. Disabletheconnection.
Press the ENTER button to clear the checkmark to disable the connection.
Press the ▼buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttontoclosetheMEDIASERVERsettingscreen.
91
4. Using the Viewer
❻ Restrictions on displaying files
TheViewerallowsyoutogiveasimplieddisplayofaPowerPointleorPDFle.
Duetosimplieddisplay,however,actualdisplaymaybedifferentfromtheoneonyourcomputerapplicationpro-
gram.
Some restrictions on PowerPoint files
• Fontswillbeautomaticallyconvertedtothefontsinstalledintheprojector.Fontscanvaryinsizeorwidth,causing
layoutcorruption
Somecharactersorfontsmaynotbedisplayed.
• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.
Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonanimation,selection,orhyperlink.
• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer
• InsomecasesMicrosoftPowerPoint97-2003formatlesmaynotbedisplayed.
Some restrictions on PDF files
• FontsnotembeddedatthetimeofPDFcreationmaynotbedisplayed.
• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.
Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonannotations,selection,form,orcolorspace.
• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer
• InsomecasesAdobeAcrobatformatlesmaynotbedisplayed.
92
5. Using On-Screen Menu
1 Using the Menus
NOTE:Theon-screenmenumaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhileinterlacedmotionvideoimageisprojected.
1. PresstheMENUbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythemenu.
NOTE: The commands such as ENTER,EXIT,, inthebottomshowavailablebuttonsforyouroperation.
2. Pressthebuttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenu.
3. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemortherst
tab.
4. Usethebuttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselecttheitemyouwanttoadjustor
set.
You canusethebuttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselectthetabyouwant.
5. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenuwindow.
6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthebuttonsontheremotecontrolor
theprojectorcabinet.
Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.
7. Repeatsteps2-6toadjustanadditionalitem,orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojec-
torcabinettoquitthemenudisplay.
NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.
8.PresstheMENUbuttontoclosethemenu.
Toreturntothepreviousmenu,pressthe
EXITbutton.
93
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Elements
Slide bar
Solid triangle
Menu mode
Tab
Radio button
High Altitude symbol
ECO mode symbol
Wireless symbol
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:
Highlight �����������������������������Indicates the selected menu or item�
Solid triangle ����������������������Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active�
Tab ��������������������������������������Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�
Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�
Source ��������������������������������Indicates the currently selected source�
Menu mode ������������������������Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED�
Off Timer remaining time ����Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�
Slide bar �����������������������������Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�
ECO mode symbol ��������������Indicates [ECO MODE] is set�
Key Lock symbol ���������������� Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�
High Altitude symbol ����������Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode�
Wireless symbol �����������������Indicate the wireless LAN connection is enabled�
Source
Available buttons
Key Lock symbol
Off Timer remaining
time
Highlight
94
5. Using On-Screen Menu
List of Menu Items
Somemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.
MenuItem Default Options
SOURCE
COMPUTER1 *
COMPUTER2 *
COMPUTER3 *
HDMI *
DisplayPort *
VIDEO *
S-VIDEO *
VIEWER *
NETWORK *
SLOT
ENTRYLIST
TESTPATTERN
ADJUST
PICTURE
MODE STANDARD
STANDARD,PROFESSIONAL
PRESET *
HIGH-BRIGHT,PRESENTATION,VIDEO,MOVIE,GRAPHIC,
sRGB
DETAILSETTINGS
GENERAL
REFERENCE *
HIGH-BRIGHT,PRESENTATION,VIDEO,MOVIE,GRAPHIC,
sRGB
GAMMA
CORRECTION
DYNAMIC,NATURAL,BLACKDETAIL
COLOR
TEMPERATURE*
1
* 5000,6500,7800,8500,9300,10500
DYNAMIC
CONTRAST
* OFF,ON
BrilliantColor OFF OFF,MEDIUM,HIGH
WHITEBALANCE
CONTRASTR 0
CONTRASTG 0
CONTRASTB 0
BRIGHTNESSR 0
BRIGHTNESSG 0
BRIGHTNESSB 0
COLOR
CORRECTION
RED 0
GREEN 0
BLUE 0
YELLOW 0
MAGENTA 0
CYAN 0
CONTRAST 50
BRIGHTNESS 50
SHARPNESS 10
COLOR 50
HUE 0
RESET
IMAGE
OPTIONS
CLOCK *
PHASE *
HORIZONTAL *
VERTICAL *
BLANKING *
TO P, BOTTOM,LEFT,RIGHT
OVERSCAN * AUTO,0[%],5[%],10[%]
ASPECTRATIO
*
(COMPUTER1/2/3)AUTO,4:3,5:4,16:9,15:9,16:10,
NATIVE
*
(COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO)AUTO,4:3,LETTERBOX,
WIDESCREEN,ZOOM
*
(COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO)AUTO,4:3WINDOW,
LETTERBOX,WIDESCREEN,4:3FILL
RESOLUTION * –
VIDEO
NOISE
REDUCTION
RANDOMNR * OFF,LOW,MEDIUM,HIGH
MOSQUITONR OFF OFF,LOW,MEDIUM,HIGH
BLOCKNR OFF OFF,ON
DEINTERLACE AUTO AUTO,VIDEO,FILM
3DY/CSEPARATION ON OFF,ON
DETAILENHANCEMENT *
SIGNALTYPE RGB RGB,COMPONENT
VIDEOLEVEL AUTO AUTO,NORMAL,ENHANCED
LENSMEMORY
STORE
MOVE
RESET
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.
*1 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.
•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.
95
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SETUP
BASIC
KEYSTONE
HORIZONTAL 0
VERTICAL 0
CORNERSTONE
PIP/PICTUREBY
PICTURE
PIP/PBPMODE PIP PIP,PICTUREBYPICTURE
PIPPOSITION BOTTOM-RIGHT TOP-LEFT,TOP-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,BOTTOM-RIGHT
PIP/PBPSOURCE OFF OFF,VIDEO,S-VIDEO
WALLCOLOR OFF
OFF,BLACKBOARD,BLACKBOARD(GRAY),LIGHT
YELLOW,LIGHTBLUE,LIGHTROSE
LAMPMODE
ECOMODE OFF OFF,ON
LAMPSELECT DUAL DUAL,SINGLE,LAMP1ON LY, LAMP2ONLY
LAMPINTERVAL
MODE
OFF OFF,12HOURS,24HOURS,1WEEK
LAMPSWITCHING
TIME
00:00 00:00-24:00
LAMPSWITCHING
DAY
SUN SUN,MON,TUE,WED,THU,FRI,SAT
CLOSEDCAPTION OFF
OFF,CAPTION1,CAPTION2,CAPTION3,CAPTION4,
TEXT1,TEXT2,TEXT3,TEXT4
OFFTIMER OFF OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00
TOOLS
ADMINISTRATORMODE,PROGRAMTIMER,TIME,
MOUSE
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
ENGLISH,DEUTSCH,FRANÇAIS,ITALIANO,ESPAÑOL,
SVENSKA,日本語
DANSK,PORTUGUÊS,
ČEŠTINA,MAGYAR,POLSKI,
NEDERLANDS,SUOMI
NORSK,TÜRKÇE,РУССКИЙ,
, Ελληνικά, 中文, 한국어
ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, ,
ไทย
MENU
COLORSELECT COLOR COLOR,MONOCHROME
SOURCEDISPLAY ON OFF,ON
MESSAGEDISPLAY ON OFF,ON
IDDISPLAY ON OFF,ON
ECOMESSAGE OFF OFF,ON
DISPLAYTIME AUTO45SEC MANUAL,AUTO5SEC,AUTO15SEC,AUTO45SEC
BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE,BLACK,LOGO
FILTERMESSAGE OFF OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H],5000[H]
INSTALLATION
(1)
ORIENTATION
DESKTOP
FRONT
DESKTOPFRONT,CEILINGREAR,DESKTOPREAR,
CEILINGFRONT
SCREEN SCREENTYPE 4:3SCREEN 4:3SCREEN,16:9SCREEN,16:10SCREEN
GEOMETRICCORRECTION OFF OFF,1,2,3
MULTI-SCREEN
COMP.
MODE OFF OFF,ON
CONTRAST 0
BRIGHTNESS 0
REF.WHITE
BALANCE
CONTRASTR 0
CONTRASTG 0
CONTRASTB 0
BRIGHTNESSR 0
BRIGHTNESSG 0
BRIGHTNESSB 0
UNIFORMITYR 0
UNIFORMITYB 0
REF.LENS
MEMORY
STORE
MOVE
RESET
LOADBYSIGNAL
FORCEDMUTE
CALIBRATION
INSTALLATION
(2)
NETWORKSETTINGS
WIREDLAN,WIRELESSLAN,WPS,NETWORK
INFORMATION,PROJECTORNAME,DOMAIN,ALERT
MAIL,NETWORKSERVICE
CONTROLPANELLOCK OFF OFF,ON
SECURITY OFF OFF,ON
COMMUNICATIONSPEED 38400bps 4800bps,9600bps,19200bps,38400bps,115200bps
REMOTESENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK
CONTROLID
CONTROLID
NUMBER
1 1–254
CONTROLID OFF OFF,ON
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.
96
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SETUP
OPTIONS(1)
AUTOADJUST NORMAL OFF,NORMAL,FINE
FANMODE
AUTO MODE:AUTO,HIGH,HIGHALTITUDE
NORMAL SETTING:FLOOR,CEILING
SIGNALSELECT(COMP3)
RGB/
COMPONENT
RGB/COMPONENT,VIDEO
SEAMLESSSWITCHING OFF OFF,ON
COLORSYSTEM
VIDEO AUTO
AUTO,NTSC3.58,NTSC4.43,PAL,PAL-M,PAL-N,PAL60,
SECAM
S-VIDEO AUTO
AUTO,NTSC3.58,NTSC4.43,PAL,PAL-M,PAL-N,PAL60,
SECAM
COMPUTER3
(VIDEO)
AUTO
AUTO,NTSC3.58,NTSC4.43,PAL,PAL-M,PAL-N,PAL60,
SECAM
SLOTPOWER
PROJECTORON ON OFF,ON
PROJECTOR
STANDBY
ENABLE DISABLE,ENABLE
OPTIONS(2)
STANDBYMODE NORMAL NORMAL,POWER-SAVING,NETWORKSTANDBY
DIRECTPOWERON OFF OFF,ON
AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3) OFF OFF,COMPUTER1,COMPUTER3
AUTOPOWEROFF OFF OFF,0:05,0:10,0:20,0:30
DEFAULTSOURCESELECT LAST
LAST,AUTO,COMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,COMPUTER3,
HDMI,DisplayPort,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,VIEWER,NETWORK
INFO.
USAGETIME
LAMP1LIFEREMAINING
LAMP2LIFEREMAINING
LAMP1HOURSUSED
LAMP2HOURSUSED
FILTERHOURSUSED
TOTALCARBONSAVINGS
SOURCE(1)
INPUTTERMINAL
RESOLUTION
HORIZONTALFREQUENCY
VERTICALFREQUENCY
SYNCTYPE
SYNCPOLARITY
SCANTYPE
SOURCENAME
ENTRYNO.
SOURCE(2)
SIGNALTYPE
VIDEOTYPE
BITDEPTH
VIDEOLEVEL
LINKRATE
LINKLANE
WIREDLAN
IPADDRESS
SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY
MACADDRESS
WIRELESS
LAN(1)
IPADDRESS
SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY
MACADDRESS
WIRELESS
LAN(2)
SSID
NETWORKTYPE
WEP/WPA
CHANNEL
SIGNALLEVEL
VERSION(1)
FIRMWARE
DATA
FIRMWARE2
VERSION(2) FIRMWARE3
OTHERS
PROJECTORNAME
MODELNO.
SERIALNUMBER
LANUNITTYPE
CONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]
isset)
RESET
CURRENTSIGNAL
ALLDATA
ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)
CLEARLAMP1HOURS
CLEARLAMP2HOURS
CLEARFILTERHOURS
97
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]
COMPUTER 1, 2, and 3
SelectsthecomputerconnectedtoyourCOMPUTER1,2,orCOMPUTER3inputconnectorsignal.
NOTE:WhenthecomponentinputsignalisconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1IN,COMPUTER2IN,orCOMPUTER3INconnector,select
[COMPUTER1],[COMPUTER2]or[COMPUTER3]respectively.TheprojectorautomaticallydetermineswhethertheCOMPUTER1,
2,or3inputsignalisanRGBorcomponentsignal.
HDMI
SelectstheHDMIcompatibleequipmentconnectedtoyourHDMIINconnector.
DisplayPort
ProjectstheimageofthedeviceconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector.
VIDEO
SelectswhatisconnectedtoyourVIDEOinput-VCR,DVDplayerordocumentcamera.
S-VIDEO
SelectswhatisconnectedtoyourS-VIDEOinput-VCRorDVDplayer.
NOTE:Aframemayfreezeforabriefperiodoftimewhenavideoisplayedbackinfast-forwardorfast-rewindwithaVideoorS-
Videosource.
VIEWER
ThisfeatureenablesyoutomakepresentationsusingaUSBmemorythatcontainsslides.
(→page66“4.UsingtheViewer”)
NETWORK
SelectsasignalfromtheLANport(RJ-45)ortheinstalledUSBwirelessLANunit(optionalformodelsforEurope,
Australia,AsiaandothercountriesthanNorthAmerica).
SLOT (for optional board)
Selectsasignalfromtheoptionalboard(SB-01HCorotherNEC’sinterfaceboards)whenitisinstalled.
ENTRY LIST
Displaysalistofsignals.Seethefollowingpages.
TEST PATTERN
Closesthemenuandswitchestothetestpatternscreen.ThepreviousscreenreappearswhentheEXITbuttonis
pressed.
NOTE:
• Themenuisnotavailablewhenthetestpatternisdisplayed.
98
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Using the Entry List
Whenanysourceorlensmemoryadjustmentsaremade,theadjustmentsareautomaticallyregisteredintheEntry
List.The(adjustmentvaluesof)registeredsignalscanbeloadedfromtheEntryListwhenevernecessary.
However,onlyupto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredinthe
EntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Yo u shouldthusdelete
(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.
Displaying the Entry list
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Pressthe or buttontoselect[SOURCE].
The SOURCE list will be displayed.
3. Usethe, , , or toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton.
TheENTRYLISTwindowswillbedisplayed.
IftheENTRYLISTwindowisnotdisplayed,switchthemenuto[ADVANCED].
To switch the menu between [ADVANCED] and [BASIC], select [APPLICATION MENU] → [TOOLS] →
[ADMINISTRATORMODE].(→ page 149)
99
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Entering the currently projected signal into the Entry List [STORE]
1. Pressthe or buttontoselectanynumber.
2. Pressthe or buttontoselect[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Calling up a signal from the Entry List [LOAD]
PresstheorbuttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.
Editing a signal from the Entry List [EDIT]
1. Pressthe or buttontoselectasignalyouwishtoedit.
2. Pressthe, , , or buttontoselect[EDIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The Edit window will be displayed.
SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.
INPUTTERMINAL Selecttheinputsource.
LOCK Setsothattheselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen[ALLDELETE]isexecuted.The
changesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.
SKIP Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.
3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE: The input terminal cannot be changed to the currently projected signal.
100
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Cutting a signal from the Entry List [CUT]
1. Pressthe or buttontoselectasignalyouwishtodelete.
2. Pressthe, , , or buttontoselect[CUT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The signal will be deleted from the Entry List and the deleted signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom
of the Entry List.
NOTE:
• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.
• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.
TIP:
• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.
• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.
CopyingandpastingasignalfromtheEntryList[COPY]/[PASTE]
1. Pressthe or buttontoselectasignalyouwishtocopy.
2. Pressthe, , , or buttontoselect[COPY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The copied signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom of the Entry List.
3. Pressthe or buttontomovetothelist.
4. Pressthe or buttontoselectasignal.
5. Pressthe, , , or buttontoselect[PASTE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Data on the clipboard will be pasted to the signal.
Deleting all the signals from the Entry List [ALL DELETE]
1. Pressthe, , , or buttontoselect[ALLDELETE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Pressthe or buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE: The locked signal cannot be deleted.
101
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]
[PICTURE]
[MODE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.
STANDARD ������������ Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 6)
PROFESSIONAL ����� Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input�
[PRESET]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.
Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.
Therearesixfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Yo u canalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]tosetuser
adjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.
Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET6].
HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�
PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�
VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�
MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�
GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�
sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values
[DETAIL SETTINGS]
102
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[GENERAL]
StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET6].
First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERA-
TURE].
HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�
PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�
VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�
MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�
GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�
sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values�
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION]
Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:
DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture�
NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture�
BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�
Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.
NOTE:
• When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.
• Whenacoloroptionotherthan[OFF]isselectedfor[WALLCOLOR],thisfunctionisnotavailable.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoadjustthecontrastratioopticallyusingthebuilt-iniris.
Toincreasethecontrastratio,select[ON].
Adjusting Brightness of White Areas [BrilliantColor]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoadjustthebrightnessofthewhiteareas.Asthepicturebecomesdim,itlooksmorenatu-
ral.
OFF ������������������������ Turns off the BrilliantColor feature�
MEDIUM ���������������� Increases brightness of the white areas�
HIGH ���������������������� Increases more brightness of the white areas�
NOTE:
• [BrilliantColor]isnotavailablewhen[HIGH-BRIGHT]or[PRESENTATION]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].
103
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Adjusting White Balance [WHITE BALANCE]
Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;
Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.
[COLOR CORRECTION]
Correctsthecolorforallsignals.
Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.
RED ����������������������� Adjusts the color in red areas, centered around the red�
This can be used to adjust to a yellow- or magenta-tinged red�
GREEN ������������������� Adjusts the color in green areas, centered around the green�
This can be used to adjust to a yellow- or cyan-tinged green�
BLUE ���������������������� Adjusts the color in blue areas, centered around the blue�
This can be used to adjust to a violet- or cyan-tinged blue�
YELLOW ���������������� Adjusts the color in yellow areas, centered around the yellow�
This can be used to adjust to a red- or green-tinged yellow�
MAGENTA �������������� Adjusts the color in magenta areas, centered around the magenta�
This can be used to adjust to a red- or blue-tinged magenta�
CYAN ��������������������� Adjusts the color in cyan areas, centered around the cyan�
This can be used to adjust to a green- or blue-tinged cyan�
[CONTRAST]
Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.
[BRIGHTNESS]
Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.
[SHARPNESS]
Controlsthedetailoftheimage.
[COLOR]
Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.
[HUE]
Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.
Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE
COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI(RGB) Ye s Ye s Yes No No
COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI
(COMPONENT)
Yes Yes Ye s Yes Yes
VIDEO/S-VIDEO/COMPONENT Yes Ye s Yes Yes Ye s
VIEWER/NETWORK Yes Ye s Ye s No No
Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable
[RESET]
Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;
Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.
Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselected
willnotbereset.
104
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[IMAGE OPTIONS]
AdjustingClockandPhase[CLOCK/PHASE]
ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.
CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This
function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�
PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is
evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)
Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�
NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.
105
5. Using On-Screen Menu
AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]
Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.
- Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.
- Theadjustmentsfor[CLOCK],[PHASE],[HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestoredinmemoryforthe
currentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,
itsadjustmentswillbecalledupandapplied.
Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]andreset
theadjustments.
[BLANKING]
Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.
SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]
Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.
Projected image
Overscaned by 10%
NOTE:
• The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable:
-when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].
-when[VIEWER]or[NETWORK]isselectedfor[SOURCE]
106
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting the Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO]
Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’svertical:horizontalaspectratio.
Selectthescreentype(4:3screen,16:9screenor16:10screen)atthescreensettingbeforesettingtheaspectratio.
(→page116)
Theprojectorautomaticallyidentiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.
For Computer signal
ForComponent/Video/S-Videosignals
Whenthescreentypeissetto4:3 Whenthescreentypeissetto16:9or16:10
Resolution AspectRatio
VGA 640×480 4:3
SVGA 800×600 4:3
XGA 1024×768 4:3
WXGA 1280×768 15:9
WXGA 1280×800 16:10
HD(FWXGA) 1366×768 approx.16:9
WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10
SXGA 1280×1024 5:4
SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3
WXGA+ 1600×900 16:9
UXGA 1600×1200 4:3
WSXGA+ 1680×1050 16:9
FHD(1080P) 1920×1080 16:9
WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10
Options Function
AUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.
Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,
selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.
4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.
5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio
16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio
15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio
16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio
107
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignal
hasalowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page2, 215)
Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,
thecenterofanimagewillbedisplayed.
LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirections
totthescreen.
WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.
ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.
Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.
4:3FILL Theimageofasignal(4:3)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.
TIP:
• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.
• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect
ratioforavidesource.
Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formovielm.
• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.
[RESOLUTION]
Thisfunctionsetstheresolutionofaprojectedimageifauto-detectfailstoworkwell.
108
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[VIDEO]
Using Noise Reduction [NOISE REDUCTION]
Thisfunctionisusedtoreducevideonoise.
RANDOM NR ��������� Reduces flickering random noise in an image�
MOSQUITO NR ������ Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during DVD playback�
BLOCK NR ������������� Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns by selecting ON�
Selecting Interlaced Progressive Conversion Process Mode [DEINTERLACE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.
AUTO ��������������������� Determines an appropriate interlaced-to-progressive conversion process automatically�
VIDEO �������������������� Applies a normal interlaced-to-progressive conversion process�
FILM ���������������������� Applies the automatic detection mode for telecine signals� This option is recommended for a movie pic-
ture�
NOTE:ThisfunctionisnotavailablewithRGBsignals.
TurningOnorOffthe3DDimensionalSeparation[3DY/CSEPARATION]
WhenprojectinganimagefromaVIDEOinput,settoONtoprojectthehighestqualityimage.
OFF ������������������������ Turns off the 3 dimensional separation feature�
ON ������������������������� Turns on the 3 dimensional separation feature�
NOTE:OnlyavailableforNTSC3.58videosignals.
[DETAIL ENHANCEMENT]
Thisfunctionenhancesthecontoursoftheimagewhenprojectingcomponentsignals.
[SIGNAL TYPE]
TheprojectorautomaticallyidentieswhethertheCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2orCOMPUTER3*inputsignalsare
RGBorcomponentsignalstoprojecttheimage.Ifthecolorsareunnatural,however,tryswitchingthesetting.
*ForCOMPUTER3,thecomputersignalandvideosignalcanbeselectedatSIGNALSELECT(COMP3).
RGB ����������������������� Switches to the RGB input�
COMPONENT ��������� Switches to the component signal input�
109
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[VIDEOLEVEL]
Thisfunctionselectsvideosignallevelwhentheprojector’sHDMIandDisplayPortinputconnectorsandanexternal
deviceareconnected.
AUTO ��������������������� The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal�
Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly� In this case, switch to “NORMAL”
or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting�
NORMAL ���������������� This disables the enhanced mode�
ENHANCED ������������ This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically�
Using the Lens Memory Function [LENS MEMORY]
ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluesforeachinputsignalwhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFO-
CUSbuttonsoftheprojectorortheremotecontrol.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.This
willeliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.
STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory for each input signal�
MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted values to the current signal�
RESET �������������������� Returns the adjusted values to the last condition�
NOTE:
• Tostoreadjustedvaluescommontoalltheinputsources,usetheREF.LENSMEMORYfunction.Seepage45, 118.
• LensmemoryadjustmentswillbeautomaticallyregisteredtheENTRYLIST.Theselensmemoryadjustmentscanbeloadedfrom
theENTRYLIST.(→ page 99)
Notethatperforming[CUT]or[ALLDELETE]intheENTRYLISTwilldeletelensmemoryadjustmentsaswellassourceadjust-
ments. This deletion will not take effect until other adjustments is loaded.
110
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]
[BASIC]
CorrectingVerticalKeystoneDistortionManually[KEYSTONE]
Youcancorrectverticaldistortionmanually.(→page26)
TIP:Whenthisoptionishighlighted,pressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplayitsslidebarforadjustment.
Selecting Cornerstone Mode [CORNERSTONE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutocorrecttrapezoidaldistortion.
SelectingthisitemwilldisplaytheCornerstoneadjustmentscreen.(→page37)
NOTE:The[CORNERSTONE]itemisnotavailablewhen[KEYSTONE]or[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]isselected.
UsingthePIP/PICTUREBYPICTUREFunction[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.(→page40)
MODE:
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecttwomodes:PIPandPICTUREBYPICTURE.
PIP:Thisoptionallowsyoutoviewasubpictureinthemainpicture.
PICTUREBYPICTURE:Thisallowsyoutoviewtwopicturessidebyside.
POSITION:
When[PIP]isselectedfor[MODE],thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthepositionofasubpictureinthemainpic-
ture.
Theoptionsare:TOP-LEFT,TOP-RIGHT,BOTTOMLEFT,andBOTTOMRIGHT.
NOTE:The[POSITION]cannotbeselectedwhen[PICTUREBYPICTURE]isselected.
111
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SOURCE:
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectasubpicturesignal.
Theoptionsare:OFF,VIDEOandS-VIDEO.
Selecting[OFF]willcancelthePIP/PICTUREBYPICTUREmodeandreturntothenormalscreen.
Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]
Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.
[LAMP MODE]
Theprojectorisdesignedtoaccepttwolamps(duallampsystem).
Thisduallampsystemprovidesprolongedlamplifeorhighbrightnessorextralamp(Extendedlifelamp).
The[LAMPMODE]itemhas3options:[ECOMODE],[LAMPSELECT],and[LAMPINTERVALMODE].
NOTE: Be sure to use the same lamp type for both lamp 1 and 2.
Setting Eco Mode [ECO MODE]
TheECOMODEincreaseslamplife,whileloweringpowerconsumptionandcuttingdownonCO
2
emissions.
Twobrightnessmodesofthelampcanbeselected:[OFF]and[ON]modes.
(→page33)
112
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting the lamp to be used [LAMP SELECT]
Thisfeatureallowsyoutoselectwhichlamptobeused.
NOTE: This option is not displayed in the Basic menu.
DUAL ��������������������� Select to use the two lamps at the same time to increase brightness�
SINGLE ������������������ Lights either lamp 1 or 2 whichever was used last� This option also selects Lamp 1 or Lamp 2 according to
the time preset with Lamp Interval�
LAMP 1 ONLY �������� Select to use the Lamp 1 of the two lamps� (Lamp 1 on the right of the rear side)
LAMP 2 ONLY �������� Select to use the Lamp 2 of the two lamps� (Lamp 2 on the left of the rear side)
TIP:
OnSelecting[SINGLE]for[LAMPSELECT]
• Alamphasapropertythatitsbrightnessgraduallydecreaseswithage.Tokeepthebrightnessoftwolampsonthesamelevelas
muchaspossible,select[SINGLE]for[LAMPSELECT].
• Lamplifewilldecreasewhenshorterlampintervaltimesaresetwithintheon-screenmenu.Youarerecommendedtoextendthe
lampintervaltime.
Settingthelampinterval[LAMPINTERVALMODE]
Thisallowsyoutospecifythetimeforswitchingbetweenthetwolampsalternately.Thisoptionisavailableonlywhen
[SINGLE]isselectedfor[LAMPSELECT].
OFF ������������������������ Turns off the lamp interval mode setting�
12 HOURS/24 HOURS/1 WEEK
������������������������������ Select one of these three options for interval time�
NOTE:
• Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[SINGLE]isselectedfor[LAMPSELECT].
• Beforesetting[LAMPINTERVALMODE],[LAMPSWITCHINGTIME]or[LAMPSWITCHINGDAY],makesurethatthecurrentdate
andtimeissetfortheprojector.Tosetthedateandtimefortheprojector,select[APPLICATIONMENU]→[TOOLS]→[DATE
ANDTIME]fromthemenu.(→ page 153)
Setting the time for changing the lamp [LAMP SWITCHING TIME]
Thisallowsyoutosetthetimeforchangingthelamp.
Example–When[SINGLE]isselectedfor[LAMPSELECT]and[24HOURS]for[LAMPINTERVALMODE]:
Lamp 1
Lamp 2
24 hours 24 hours
24 hours 24 hours
This indicates the lamp is turned on.
This indicates the lamp is turned off.
Current Time Switching Time* Switching Time
(*) After setting the Current Time, if the value between Current Time and Switching Time is less than five (5) minutes, the first
lamp switching instance does not take place.
113
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Setting the day for changing the lamp [LAMP SWITCHING DAY]
Thisallowsyoutosetthedayforchangingthelamp.
Theoptionsare:SUN(Sunday),MON(Monday),TUE(Tuesday),WED(Wednesday),THU(Thursday),FRI(Friday),
andSAT (Saturday).
NOTE:
• Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[1WEEK]isselectedfor[LAMPINTERVALMODE].
Setting Closed Caption [CLOSED CAPTION]
ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideo
orS-Video.
OFF ������������������������ This exits the closed caption mode�
CAPTION 1-4 ��������� Text is superimposed�
TEXT 1-4 ���������������� Text is displayed�
Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER]
1. Selectyourdesiredtimebetween30minutesand16hours:OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00.
2. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
3. Theremainingtimestartscountingdown.
4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.
NOTE:
• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.
• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3
MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.
[TOOLS]
See“APPLICATIONMENU”onpage131.
Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE]
Youcanchooseoneof27languagesforon-screeninstructions.
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
114
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[MENU]
Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT]
Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.
TurningOn/OffSourceDisplay[SOURCEDISPLAY]
ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,COMPUTER3,HDMI,Display-
Port,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,VIEWER,NETWORKtobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.
Turning messages on and off [MESSAGE DISPLAY]
Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.
Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthe
securitylockiscanceled.
TurningON/OFFControlID[IDDISPLAY]
ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control
is pressed� (→ page 119)
TurningOn/OffEcoMessage[ECOMESSAGE]
Thisoptionturnsonoroffthefollowingmessageswhentheprojectoristurnedon.
TheEcoMessagepromptstheusertosaveenergy.When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE],youwillgetamessage
topromptyoutoselect[ON]for[ECOMODE].
When[ON]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
Toclosethemessage,pressanyoneofthebuttons.Themessagewilldisappearifnobuttonoperationisdonefor
30seconds.
115
5. Using On-Screen Menu
When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythe[ECOMODE]screen.(→page33)
Toclosethemessage,presstheEXITbutton.
Selecting Menu Display Time [DISPLAY TIME]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.The
presetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefac-
torypreset.
SelectingaColororLogoforBackground[BACKGROUND]
Use this featuretodisplay a blue/blackscreenor logo when no signalisavailable.The defaultbackgroundis
[BLUE].
NOTE:
•
Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackground
is displayed without the logo when there is no signal.
Selecting Interval Time for Filter Message [FILTER MESSAGE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthetimepreferencebetweendisplayingthemessageforcleaningthelters.Clean
thelterwhenyougetthemessage“PLEASECLEANFILTER.”(→page171)
Sixoptionsareavailable:OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H],5000[H]
Thedefaultsettingis[OFF].
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
[INSTALLATION(1)]
Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION]
Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,
desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.
116
5. Using On-Screen Menu
DESKTOPFRONT
CEILINGREAR
DESKTOPREAR
CEILINGFRONT
Selecting Aspect Ratio and Position for Screen [SCREEN]
Screentype Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.
4:3screen Forascreenwitha4:3aspectratio
16:9screen Forascreenwitha16:9aspectratio
16:10screen Forascreenwitha16:10aspectratio
Displayposition Whenthescreentypeissetto16:9or16:10,adjuststheverticalpositionofthedisplay
range.
Downward
Upward
NOTE:
• Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu.
(→ page 106)
Using Geometric Correction [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]
Thisfeatureretrievesgeometricdataregisteredintheprojectormemory.
Threepresetsofgeometricdatahavebeenregistered.Toturnoffthisfeature,select[OFF].
NOTE:
• The[KEYSTONE]and[CORNERSTONE]adjustmentsarenotavailablewhengeometricdataisapplied.
• Toclearyourgeometricdata,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2seconds.
• The[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]featurecancauseanimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectroni-
cally.
117
5. Using On-Screen Menu
UsingMulti-ScreenCompensation[MULTI-SCREENCOMP.]
Thisfeatureallowsyoutomatchbrightnessofimagesprojectedfrommultipleprojectors.
Beforeusing[MULTI-SCREENCOMP.],youneedtomatchcolorofimagesprojectedfrommultipleprojectors.
MODE �������������������� OFF: Turns off this function�
ON: Turns on this function� The [BRIGHTNESS] and the [CONTRAST] can be adjusted�
CONTRAST ������������ Adjusts the bright part of the picture�
BRIGHTNESS ��������� Adjusts the dark part of the picture�
Adjusting
1. Prepare black and white images so that the images can be displayed on the computer screen.
2. Display the black image on the computer screen, and project the image from the projector.
3. Select[MULTI-SCREENCOMP.]→ [MODE] → [ON].
4. Adjust the dark part of the images.
Press the buttontoselect[BRIGHTNESS]andusethe or to match the black part of another projector.
5. Display the white screen on the computer screen.
Project the image from two or more projectors.
6. Adjust the bright part of the images.
Press the button to select [CONTRAST] and use the or to match the white part of another projector.
Moving the slide bar toward [+] (plus) can change the white part of the image. Should this happen, move the
slide bar toward [−] (minus) to adjust the brightness.
TIP:
• Whenyouusemultipleprojectors,youcanusethe[CONTROLID]functiontooperateasingleprojectororalltheprojectorsfrom
theremotecontrol.(→ page 119)
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
[REF. WHITE BALANCE]
Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.
Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.
Uniformityisalsoadjustedwhentheredness(R)andblueness(B)ofthewhitecolorinthescreen’shorizontal(left/
right)directionareuneven.
BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B
������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s black color�
CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B
������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s white color�
UNIFORMITY R ������ The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the redness on the left side of the picture (increasing
towards the left edge) and the weaker the redness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the
right edge)�
This is reversed when set to the − side�
UNIFORMITY B ������ The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the blueness on the left side of the picture (increasing
towards the left edge) and the weaker the blueness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the
right edge)�
This is reversed when set to the − side�
118
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Using the Reference Lens Memory Function [REF. LENS MEMORY]
ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluescommontoallinputsourceswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOM
andFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojectorortheremotecontrol.Theadjustedvaluesstoredinmemorycanbeusedasa
referencetothecurrent.
STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory as a reference�
MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted reference values stored in [STORE] to the current signal�
RESET �������������������� Returns the adjusted reference values to the factory default setting�
LOAD BY SIGNAL �� For change to take effect at the time of source selection, select [YES]�
FORCED MUTE ������ To turn off the image during lens shift, select [YES]�
CALIBRATION �������� Corrects the adjustable zoom and focus range�
The adjustable zoom and focus range can vary depending on the lens in use� For the Lens Memory function
to produce an aligned image as accurately as possible, be sure to perform [CALIBRATE] after replacement
of the lens�
NOTE:Thisoptionisonlyavailablewhen[YES]isselectedfor[MOVEWITHSIGNALCHANGE].
NOTE:
• Adjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]willnotbereturnedtodefaultwhenperforming[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALLDATA]for
[RESET]fromthemenu.
• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 45, 109)
119
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[INSTALLATION(2)]
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK]
ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.
NOTE:
• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.
• Whenthecontrolpanelislocked,pressingandholdingtheEXITbuttonontheprojectorcabinetforabout10secondswillchange
thesettingto[OFF].
TIP:Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[
]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.
Enabling Security [SECURITY]
ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.
Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page42)
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED]
ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to115200bps.
Thedefaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingonthe
equipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).
NOTE:
• Select[38400bps]orlesswhenusingtheUserSupportware.
• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Turning On or Off Remote Sensor [REMOTE SENSOR]
Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.
Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,andBACK.
Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrol
sensoroftheprojector,changeanotheroption.
Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID]
YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROL
IDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogether
usingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.
CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�
CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID set-
ting�
120
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NOTE:
• When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupport
theCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
•PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControl
ID.
Assigning or Changing the Control ID
1. Turnontheprojector.
2. PresstheIDSETbuttonontheremotecontrol.
TheCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.
IftheprojectorcanbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[ACTIVE]
willbedisplayed.Iftheprojectorcannotbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrol
ID,the[INACTIVE]willbedisplayed.To operatetheinactiveprojector,assignthe
controlIDusedfortheprojectorbyusingthefollowingprocedure(Step3).
3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSET
buttonontheremotecontrol.
Example:
To assign “3”, press the “3” button on the remote control.
NoIDmeansthatalltheprojectorscanbeoperatedtogetherwithasingleremote
control.Toset“NoID”,enter“000”orpresstheCLEARbutton.
TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.
4. ReleasetheIDSETbutton.
TheupdatedCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.
NOTE:
•TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.
•Accidentallypressinganyoneofthebuttonsoftheremotecontrolwillclearcurrentlyspecied
IDwithbatteriesremoved.
121
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[OPTIONS(1)]
Setting Auto Adjust [AUTO ADJUST]
ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfor
noiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].
OFF ������������������������ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�
NORMAL ���������������� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�
FINE ����������������������� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-
MAL]is selected�
Selecting Fan Mode [FAN MODE]
FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.
MODE �������������������� Select three modes for fan speed: AUTO, HIGH, and HIGH ALTITUDE�
AUTO: The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature�
HIGH: The built-in fans run at high speed
HIGH ALTITUDE: The built-in fans run at a high speed� Select this option when using the projector at altitudes
approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher�
SETTING ���������������� Select one of the two options ([FLOOR] or [CEILING]) according to the installation orientation of the projec-
tor� See the drawing on your right�
Whenyouwishtocooldownthetemperatureinsidetheprojectorquickly,select[HIGH].
122
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NOTE:
• When[HIGHALTITUDE]isselectedfor[FANMODE],asymbolicon
will be displayed at the bottom of the menu.
• ItisrecommendedthatyouselectHighspeedmodeifyouusetheprojectornon-stopforconsecutivedays.
•Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigher.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancause
theprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturnontheprojector.
•Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1600metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethe
lamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
•Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofinternalpartssuchasthe
lamp.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Selecting the Signal Format [SIGNAL SELECT(COMP3)]
WhenanoutputdeviceisconnectedtotheCOMPUTER3videoinputconnectors,thissetstheinputsignal.
RGB/COMPONENT � RGB and component signals are identified automatically�
VIDEO �������������������� This switches to the video signal�
NOTE:Whenavideocable(commerciallyavailable)isconnectedtotheCOMPUTER3videoinputconnectors’G/Yconnector,video
signalscanbeprojected.Inthiscase,setto“VIDEO”.
[SEAMLESS SWITCHING]
Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldtoswitchtothenewimagewithout
abreakduetoabsenceofasignal.
[COLOR SYSTEM]
ThisfeatureallowsyoutoselecttheTVvideosignal,whichdiffersfromcountrytocountry(NTSC,PAL,etc.).
Thisissetto[AUTO]byfactorydefault.Setthisiftheprojectorcannotidentifythesignalautomatically.
Setting for the Optional Board [SLOT POWER]
WhenusingtheoptionalboardsuchasSB-01HCinstalledintheslot,setthefollowingoptions.
PROJECTOR ON �����������������Thisfeaturewillturnonoroffthepowertotheoptionalboard.
OFF: Forcibly turn off the power to the optional board installed in the slot�
ON (Default): Turn on the power to the optional board installed in the slot�
PROJECTOR STANDBY �������Thisfeaturewillautomaticallyenableordisabletheoptionalboardinstalledintheslot
whentheprojectorisinstandby.
DISABLE: Select this option to disable the optional board in the projector standby�
ENABLE (Default): Select this option to enable the optional board in the projector standby�
NOTE:
• Select[OFF]whentheoptionalboardisnotinstalledintotheslot.
123
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[OPTIONS(2)]
SelectingPower-savingin[STANDBYMODE]
Theprojectorhasthreestandbymodes:[NORMAL],[POWER-SAVING]and[NETWORKSTANDBY].
ThePOWER-SAVINGmodeisthemodethatallowsyoutoputtheprojectorinthepower-savingconditionwhich
consumeslesspowerthantheNORMALmode.TheprojectorispresetforNORMALmodeatthefactory.
NORMAL �����������������������������Power indicator: Orange light/STATUS indicator: Green light
POWER-SAVING �����������������Power indicator: Red light/STATUS indicator: Off
The following connectors, buttons or functions will not work during this mode�
- MONITOR OUT (COMP� 1) connector
- LAN and Mail Alert functions
- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet
- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control
- Virtual Remote Tool fucntion
- [AUTO POWER ON (COMP1/3)]
- PC control commands for other than power-on
NETWORK STANDBY ����������When in the standby mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the STATUS indicator will
not light� This shows that the projector’s power can be turned on by wired LAN�
When in the standby mode, the following connectors, buttons or functions will not work:
- MONITOR OUT (COMP� 1) connector
- Wireless LAN Unit
- [AUTO POWER ON (COMP1/3)]
- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet
- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control
- PC control commands for other than power-on
Important:
• When[CONTROLPANELLOCK]or[CONTROLID]isturnedon,orwhen[COMPUTER1]or[COMPUTER3]isselectedfor[AUTO
POWERON(COMP1/3)],the[STANDBYMODE]settingbecomesinvalid.
Thismeansthattheprojectorisinthesameconditionwhenthe[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE].
NOTE:
• Evenwhen[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],poweronoroffcanbedonebyusingthePCCONTROLport.
• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO
2
emission reduction.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Enabling Direct Power On [DIRECT POWER ON]
Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.Thiseliminatesthe
needtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.
124
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TurningOntheProjectorByApplyingComputerSignal[AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)]
WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1
INorCOMPUTER3INinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.
ThisfunctionalityeliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinet
topowerontheprojector.
Tousethisfunction,rstconnectacomputertotheprojectorandtheprojectortoanactiveACinput.
NOTE:
• Disconnectingacomputersignalfromthecomputerwillnotpowerofftheprojector.Werecommendusingthisfunctionincom-
binationoftheAUTOPOWEROFFfunction.
• Thisfunctionwillnotbeavailableunderthefollowingconditions:
- whenacomponentsignalisappliedtotheCOMPUTER1INorCOMPUTER3INconnector
- whenaSynconGreenRGBsignalorcompositesyncsignalisapplied
• When[AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3]isset,the[STANDBYMODE]settingbecomesinvalid.Thismeansthattheprojectorisin
thesameconditionwhenthe[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE].
• ToenabletheAUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)afterturningofftheprojector,wait3secondsandinputacomputersignal.
Ifacomputer
signal
isstillpresentwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,theAUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)willnotworkandthe
projector remains in standby mode.
Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF]
Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:5min.,10min.,
20min.,30min.)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.
NOTE:
• The[AUTOPOWEROFF]functionwillnotworkwhen[VIEWER]or[NETWORK]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT]
Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
LAST ���������������������� Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�
AUTO ��������������������� Searches for an active source in order of COMPUTER1 → COMPUTER2 → COMPUTER3 → HDMI →
DisplayPort → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → VIEWER → COMPUTER1 and displays the first found source�
COMPUTER1 ��������� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
COMPUTER2 ��������� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
COMPUTER3 ��������� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 3 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
HDMI ��������������������� Displays the digital source from the HDMI IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
DisplayPort ������������ Displays the digital source from the DisplayPort every time the projector is turned on�
VIDEO �������������������� Displays the Video source from the VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
S-VIDEO ���������������� Displays the Video source from the S-VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
VIEWER ����������������� Displays slides or plays back movie files from the USB memory device every time the projector is turned
on�
NETWORK ������������� Displays the data sent from the computer via the LAN port (RJ-45) or the wireless LAN unit (sold separately)
mounted on the projector is projected�
SLOT ���������������������� Displays a signal from the optional (SB-01HC or other NEC’s optional boards) when it is installed�
125
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]
Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlampusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedisas
follows:
TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.
[USAGE TIME]
[LAMP1LIFEREMAINING](%)*
[LAMP2LIFEREMAINING](%)*
[LAMP1HOURSUSED](H)
[LAMP2HOURSUSED](H)
[FILTERHOURSUSED](H)
[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)
* Theprogressindicatorshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.
Thevalueinformsyouoftheamountoflampusage.Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0,theLAMPLIFE
REMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100Hoursandstartscountingdown.
Iftheremaininglamptimereaches0hours,theprojectorwillnotturnon.
• Themessagetotheeffectthatthelamportheltersshouldbereplacedwillbedisplayedforoneminutewhen
theprojectoristurnedonandwhenthePOWERbuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrolispressed.
Todismissthismessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrol.
Lamp life(H)
Replacement lamp
ECO MODE
OFF ON
2000 2500 NP22LP
• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]
Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-
culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page34)
126
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SOURCE(1)]
INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTION
HORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICAL FREQUENCY
SYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITY
SCANTYPE SOURCENAME
ENTRYNO.
[SOURCE(2)]
SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPE
BITDEPTH VIDEOLEVEL
LINKRATE LINKLANE
[WIRED LAN]
IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY MACADDRESS
127
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[WIRELESS LAN(1)]
IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY MACADDRESS
[WIRELESS LAN(2)]
SSID NETWORKTYPE
WEP/WPA CHANNEL
SIGNALLEVEL
[VERSION(1)]
FIRMWARE DATA
FIRMWARE2
128
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[VERSION(2)]
FIRMWARE3
[OTHERS]
PROJECTORNAME MODELNO.
SERIALNUMBER LANUNITTYPE
CONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]isset)
129
5. Using On-Screen Menu
8 Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]
Returning to Factory Default [RESET]
TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)except
thefollowing:
[CURRENTSIGNAL]
Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.
Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],
[ASPECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].
[ALLDATA ]
Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.
AllitemscanberesetEXCEPT[ENTRYLIST],[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[SCREEN],
[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[MULTI-SCREENCOMP.],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[STATICCONVERGENCE],
[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[CONTROLID],[SEAMLESSSWITCHING],
[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[REF.LENSMEMORY],[DATEANDTIME],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMP
HOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN],and[WIRELESSLAN].
Toresetthelampusagetime,see“ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]”below.
[ALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)]
Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypresetexcept[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],
[FILTERMESSAGE],[SCREEN],[MULTI-SCREENCOMP.],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[STATICCONVERGENCE],
[CONTROLPANEL LOCK], [SEAMLESS SWITCHING], [SECURITY SETTINGS], [COMMUNICATIONSPEED],
[CONTROLID],[FANMODE],[GEOMETIRCCORRECTION],[REF.LENSMEMORY],[DATEANDTIME],[STANDBY
MODE],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],
[WIREDLAN],and[WIRELESSLAN].
Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.
NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.
ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMP1HOURS/CLEARLAMP2HOURS]
Resetsthelampclockbacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconrmation.Select[YES]andpress
theENTERbutton.
NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelampusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the
lamp has reached the end of its life. In this condition you cannot clear the lamp hour meter on the menu. If this happens, press the
HELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbacktozero.Dothisonlyafterreplacingthelamp.
130
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Clearing the Filter Usage Hours [CLEAR FILTER HOURS]
Resetsthelterusagebacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconrmation.Select[YES]andpress
theENTERbutton.
The[OFF]itemisselectedfor[FILTERMESSAGE]atthetimeofshipment.When[OFF]isselected,youdonotneed
toclearthelterusagehour.
NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelterusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
131
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❾ Application Menu
When[NETWORK]isselectedfromthe[SOURCE]menu,theapplicationmenu[APPLICATIONMENU]willbedis-
played.
TheapplicationmenuallowsyoutosetuptheUserSupportware,NetworkSettings(NETWORKSETTINGS)and
Tools(TOOLS).
TheUserSupportwareiscontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
In[ADMINISTRATORMODE],either[ADVANCED]menuor[BASIC]menucanbeselected.(→page149)
The[BASIC]menucontainsminimumessentialsofmenusandcommands.
IMAGE EXPRESS UTILITY
Thisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseImage
ExpressUtility.
Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.
NETWORK PROJECTOR
Thisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseNetwork
Projector.
Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.
132
5. Using On-Screen Menu
REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION
ThisallowsyoutosetupforcomputernameentryandeffectsforRemoteDesktop.
NOTE:
• AUSBkeyboardisrequiredtosetuptheRemoteDesktopConnection.
133
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORK SETTINGS
Important:
• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.
• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→ page
163)
TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection
To set up the projector for a LAN connection:
Select[WIREDLAN]or[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].
TwosettingscanbesetforwiredorwirelessLAN.
Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpressthe
ENTERbutton.(→page134)
To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number:
Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredorwirelessLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
(→page134)
To connect a DHCP server:
Tur non[DHCP]forwiredorwirelessLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithout
usingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page135)
TosetonlyforwirelessLAN(NETWORKTYPEandWEP/WPA):
Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwirelessLAN,andthenselect[ADVANCED]and[OK]andpresstheENTER
button.TheAdvancedmenuwillbedisplayed.(→page136)
To select an SSID:
Select[ADVANCED]→[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
SelectanSSIDandpressthe>buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Ifyoudonotuse[SITESURVEY],typetheSSIDandselect[INFRASTRUCTURE]or[ADHOC].(→page136)
Toreceivelampreplacementtimeorerrormessagesviae-mail:
Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].
Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page147)
Toexecute[EASYCONNECTION]usingImageExpressUtility2.0orImageExpressUtility2forMac:
The[EASYCONNECTION]isamodethatcanabbreviatethetroublesomeLANsettingswhenusingtheImage
ExpressUtilityandconnectingthePCandprojectorviaawirelessLAN.
ImageExpressUtility2.0andImageExpressUtility2forMacarecontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-
ROM.
Touse[EASYCONNECTION],select[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[EASYCONNECTION].
NOTE:The[EASYCONNECTION]functionisavailableonWindows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPSP3.
134
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WIREDLANorWIRELESSLAN(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
*TousethewirelessLANfunctions,connectaseparatelysoldwirelessLANunittotheprojector.(→page164)
PROFILES • UptotwosettingsfortheLANportorUSBwirelessLANunit
canbestoredinmemoryoftheprojector.Totaloffoursettings
canbestored.
Fivesettingscanbestored:twoforthebuilt-inLANport,two
forwirelessLANandoneforWPS.
• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor
[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.
Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.This
willstoreyoursettingsinmemory.
• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory:
Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-
FILES]list.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
• TostopemittingradiowavesfromtheUSBWirelessLANUnit,
select[DISABLE]fromthe[PROFILES]list.
• Selecting[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]willallowtheprojectorto
createaninfrastructurenetwork.
AnSSIDwillbeautomaticallycreated.
WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectorischanged,itwillauto-
maticallytakeeffectinoneortwominutes.
Select“ObtainanIPAddressAutomatically”tosettheIPad-
dressofaconnectedcomputer.
Ittakesafewsecondsforachangeofyourcomputer’sIPad-
dresstocomeintoeffectinWindows7/WindowsVistawhileit
takesoneortwominutesinWindowX P.
Whenyouconnectwithyour computer to save yourprole
andselect“Automaticallyconnectwhenwithinrange”fromthe
PropertiestabofWirelessNetworkinWindowsforyourselected
prole,yourwirelessLANwillbeaccessedunderthefollowing
conditions:
• atthetimeofturningonthecomputerortheprojector
• whenthenotebooktypeiswithintherangeoftheprojector’s
wirelessLANcanbeachieved.
DatatransmissionbetweenwirelessLANandwiredLANisnot
possible.
Whenthe[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]modeisusedtosend
images,itisrecommendedtoconnecttoonlyonecomputer.
—
135
5. Using On-Screen Menu
• Whenselecting[WPS],thenetworkwillbeconnectedbyusing
settingsstoredautomaticallywiththeWPSfunction.
Selecting[WPS]willallowtheprojectortoaccessthenetwork
byusingthesettingstheWPSfunctionautomaticallystored.
DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstothe
projectorfromyourDHCPserver.
ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmask
numberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.
—
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector
when[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtothe
projectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthe networkconnectedtotheprojector
when[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
WNSCONFIGURA-
TION
SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnected
totheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyour
DNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.
ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserver
connectedtothe
projector.
Up
to12numeric
characters
DNSCONFIGURA-
TION
SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnected
totheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.
Upto12numeric
characters
ADVANCED* ThismenuallowsyoutosetvariousitemsforyourwirelessLAN
connection(networktype,security).
—
RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhave
changed[PROFILES].
—
*The[ADVANCED]settingscreenisavailablefor[WIRELESSLAN]only.
NOTE:
• Ifyouselect[EASYCONNECTION]from[PROFILES],youcannotmakesettingstoDHCPanditsfollowingitemsexcept[CHAN-
NEL]in[ADVANCED].
AdvancedSettings(settingsonlyrequiredwhenusingaseparatelysoldwirelessLANunit)
(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
136
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.Select
anSSIDwhichyoucanaccess.
ToselectanSSID,highlight[SSID]andusethetoselect[OK]
andpresstheENTERbutton.
����������������������� Wireless access point
����������������������� Ad Hoc PC
����������������������� WEP or WPA enabled
—
SECURITY
Thiswillturnonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmis-
sion.
Touseencryption,specifyaWEPkeyorencryptionkey.Select
yoursecuritytypeappropriateforyourcomputerandthewire-
lessLANunit.
DISABLE ���������������� Will not turn on the encryption feature� Your com-
munications may be monitored by someone�
WEP(64bit) ������������ Uses 64-bit datalength for secure transmis-
sion�
WEP(128bit) ���������� Uses 128-bit datalength for secure transmission�
This option will increase privacy and security
when compared to use of 64-bit datalength en-
cryption�
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP
������������������������������ These options provide stronger security than
WEP�
NOTE:
• Thesecuritytype,WEPkey,andencryptionkeysettingsmustbethe
sameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointinyour
wireless network.
• Whenyouuse[SECURITY],yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslow
down.
• [WPA-PSK],[WPA-EAP],[WPA2-PSK]and[WPA2-EAP]arenotavail-
ablewhen[ADHOC]isselectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].
—
SSID Enteranidentier(SSID)forwirelessLAN.Communicationcan
bedoneonlywithequipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyour
wirelessLAN.
Upto32alphanumeric
characters(case
sensitive).
NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.
INFRASTRUCTURE ���Select this option when communicating with
one or more equipment connected to the wire-
less or wired LAN network via a wireless access
point�
AD HOC ��������������������Select this option when using the wireless LAN
to directly communicate with a computer in
peer-to-peer mode�
—
CHANNEL Selecta channel. Availablechannelsvarydepending on the
countryandregion.Whenyouselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],make
surethattheprojectorandyouraccesspointareonthesame
channel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojector
andyourcomputerareonthesamechannel.
—
137
5. Using On-Screen Menu
When[WEP(64bit)]or[WEP(128bit)]isselectedfor[SECURITYTYPE]
KEYSELECT SelectsoneWEPkeyfromthefourkeysbelow.
KEY1,KEY2,KEY3,
KEY4
EnteraWEPkey.
•Maximumnumberofcharacters
Option Alphanumeric(ASCII) Hexadecimal(HEX)
WEP64bit 5 10
WEP128bit 13 26
When[WPA-PSK],[WPA-EAP],[WPA2-PSK],or[WPA2-EAP]isselectedfor[SECURITYTYPE]
ENCRYPTIONTYPE Select[TKIP]or[AES].
KEY Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.
138
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[AUTHENTICATION](requiredforwirelessonly)
SettingisrequiredforusingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
Preparation before setting
SelectawirelessLANcompliantWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPauthenticationandinstalladigitalcerticateontheprojec-
tor.
1. Set[DATEANDTIME]ontheprojector.(→page153)
2. Useacomputertosavedigitalcerticates(les)forWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPsettingtoyourUSBmemory
device.
After completing saving the file, remove the USB memory device from the computer.
Important:
• TheleformatsofdigitalcerticatethataresupportedbytheprojectorareDERandPKCS#12only.
• Theprojectorcannothandleanydigitalcerticatewhoselesizeexceeds8KB.
• CRL(CerticateRelocationList)isnotsupported.
• Clientcerticatechainisnotsupported.
3. PlugtheUSBmemorydeviceintotheUSBportoftheprojector.
Setting Procedures
1. Select[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIRELESSLAN].
2. SetitemssuchasPROFILES,DHCP,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASKandothersasrequired.
• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]for[PROFILES].If[EASYCONNECTION]isselected,WPA-PSK,WPA2-
PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is not available.
3. Select[ADVANCED]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [ADVANCED] setting screen will be displayed.
139
5. Using On-Screen Menu
4. Select[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The“SSID”listwillbedisplayed.
5. SelectaconnectingSSID,andthenselect[OK].
Finally press the ENTER button.
• SelecttheSSIDforwhichWPA-PSKorWPA2-PSKisset.
• Select[INFRASTRUCTURE(
)] for [NETWORK TYPE]. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is
not available when [AD HOC (
)] is selected.
6. Selectthe[SECURITY]tab.
The[SECURITY]pagewillbedisplayed.
7. Selectthe[SECURITYTYPE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
8. Select[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP]andpresstheENTERbutton.
9. Selectthe[TKIP/AES]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
10
.Select[TKIP]or[AES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Select[TKIP]or[AES]accordingtothesettingforyouraccesspoint.
140
5. Using On-Screen Menu
11
.Selectthe[AUTHENTICATION]tab.
The[AUTHENTICATION]pagewillbedisplayed.
Select either [EAP-TLS] or [PEAP-MSCHAPv2] for [EAP TYPE]. The setting items vary depending on the EAP
type.
See the table below.
EAPType SettingItem Note
EAP-TLS UserName 1characterormoreand32charactersor
less
ClientCerticate PKCS#12formatle
CACerticate
(Certicateauthority’scerticate)
DERformatle
PEAP-MSCHAPv2 UserName 1characterormoreand32charactersor
less
Password 1characterormoreand32charactersor
less
CACerticate
(Certicateauthority’scerticate)
DERformatle
①Selecting[EAP-TLS]for[EAPTYPE]:
The following section explains the operation for selecting [EAP-TLS].
For selecting [PEAP-MSCHAPv2], go on to Step 12 on page 142.
12.
Selectthe[USERNAME]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set a user name.
• Ausernamemustbe1characterormoreand32charactersorless.
(→ page 144)
141
5. Using On-Screen Menu
13.
Select[CLIENTCERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
A list of files (thumbnail screen) will be displayed.
• Foroperatingthethumbnailscreen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).
• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
Installing a digital certificate
Youcaninstalleachdigitalcerticate(clientcerticateandCAcerticate)for[PROFILE1(or2)]onale-by-lebasis.
• InstallarootCAcerticateforaCAcerticate.
• Ifyouinstalladigitalcerticateoveryourexistingdigitalcerticate,theexistingdigitalcerticatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenew
digitalcerticate.
• Onceadigitalcerticatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
14.
O n thethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcerticate(PKCS#12formatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydevice
andpresstheENTERbutton.
The password screen will be displayed.
15.
Select[PASSWORD]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set the password of the private key. A password
must be 1 character or more and 32 characters or less.
The selected digital certificate file will be installed on the projector.
• WhentherootCAcerticateisnotincludedinthelethatwasselectedinStep14,proceedtoStep16.When
the root certification authority certificate is included, proceed to Step 18.
16.Select[CACERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The drive list screen will be displayed.
142
5. Using On-Screen Menu
17.
O n thethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcerticate(DERformatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydevice
andpresstheENTERbutton.
• SelectyourrootCAcerticatehere.
The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.
18.
Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The[WIRELESS]pagewillbereturned.
19.
Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
20.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Thiswillcompletesetting[EAP-TLS]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].
TIP:
Clearing the digital certificate that is installed on the projector
Toclearthedigitalcerticateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.
Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcerticatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprolewillbecleared.
1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-
VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.
A message for confirmation will be displayed.
2. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The digital certificates will be cleared.
TIP:
• ThePKCS#12formatdigitalcerticateincludingaCAcerticatewillbeinstalledasarootCAcerticate.
②Selecting[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]for[EAPTYPE]:
12.
Fromthe[AUTHENTICATION]page,select[EAPTYPE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
13.
Select[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]andpresstheENTERbutton.
14.
Select[USERNAME]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set a user name.
• Ausernamemustbe32charactersorless.
(→ page 144)
143
5. Using On-Screen Menu
15.
Aftercompletingsettingausername,selectthe[PASSWORD]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set a password.
• Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.
16.
Aftercompletingsettingthepassword,select[CACERTIFICATE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The drive list screen will be displayed.
• Foroperatingthethumbnailscreen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).
• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
Installing a digital certificate
Youcaninstalleachdigitalcerticate(clientcerticateandCAcerticate)for[PROFILE1(or2)]onale-by-le
basis.
• InstallarootCAcerticateforaCAcerticate.
• Ifyouinstalladigitalcerticateoveryourexistingdigitalcerticate,theexistingdigitalcerticatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenew
digitalcerticate.
• Onceadigitalcerticatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
17.
O n thethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcerticate(DERformatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydevice
andpresstheENTERbutton.
• SelectyourrootCAcerticatehere.
The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.
144
5. Using On-Screen Menu
18.
Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The[WIRELESS]pagewillbereturned.
19.
Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
20.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Thiswillcompletesetting[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].
TIP:
Clearing the digital certificate that is installed on the projector
Toclearthedigitalcerticateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.
Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcerticatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprolewillbecleared.
1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-
VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.
A message for confirmation will be displayed.
2. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The digital certificates will be cleared.
TIP:
EnteringWEPkeys(SwitchingbetweenAlphanumericcharactersandhexadecimal)
Toenterfrom[KEY1]to[KEY4],dothefollowing:
1. Selectoneof[KEY1],[KEY2],[KEY3]and[KEY4]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed.
2. Usethe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselectacharacterandpresstheENTERbutton.
• ToenteraWEPkeyorpassphrase,usealphanumericcharacters(ASCII)orhexadecimal(HEX).To enteraPSK
key,usealphanumericcharacters(ASCII).
• Pressthe[HEX]buttontochangeto[ASCII]tosetthekeyinASCIIdigit.You cantogglethisbuttonbetween
[ASCII]and[HEX].
• Enter0x(numeralandalphabetrespectively)rightinfrontofyourkeycode.
• Hexadecimaluses0to9andAtoF.
3. AfterenteringyourWEPkeyorpassphrase,usethe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTER
button.
The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be closed.
145
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WPS
WhenthewirelessLANaccesspointconnectedtotheprojectorsupportsWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetupTM),youcan
usePINmethodorpushbuttonmethodtosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.
PINTYPE Seta4-digitor8digit-PINcodeofWPSforyouraccesspointtocompletesettingforthe
SSIDsecurity.
PUSHBUTTONTYPE Pressthededicatedbuttonoftheaccesspointandtheprojector’swirelessLANunitto
completesettingfortheSSIDsecurity.
NETWORK INFORMATION
Thefollowinginformationwillbedisplayedwhentheprojectorisconnectedtoanetwork(wiredLAN orwireless
LAN).
PROJECTORNAME
HOSTNAME
DOMAIN
NETWORKINFOR-
MATION(WIRED
LAN/WIRELESSLAN)
CONNECTIONSTATUS,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASK,GATEWAY,WINS,DNS,MAC
ADDRESS,SSID,NETWORKTYPE,WEP/WPA,CHANNEL,SIGNALLEVEL,AU-
THENTICATION,AUTHENTICATIONPERIOD
DISPLAYTHEINFOR-
MATIONINAPPLICA-
TIONMENU
Tur nonoroffthedisplayofthenetworkinformation.
Themeaningsofthesestatusstatementsaredescribedbelow.
Statement Authenticationstatus
Authenticated Authenticationisdonecorrectly.
Failure Authenticationfailed.
Authenticating… Authenticationisinprocess.
Expired Thedigitalcerticateisexpired.Or[DATE,TIMEPRESET]isnotsetcorrectly.
TimeError The[DATE,TIMEPRESET]hasbeencleared.Setthecorrectdateandtime.
146
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROJECTORNAME(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-
mericcharactersand
symbols
DOMAIN(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
Setahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.
HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto15alphanumeric
characters
DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumeric
characters
147
5. Using On-Screen Menu
ALERTMAIL(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerror
messagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.
Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�
Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�
Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:
Thelampandltersareattheendofitsusablelife.Please
replacethelampandlters.
ProjectorName:NECProjector
Lamp1HoursUsed:xxxx[H]
Lamp2HoursUsed:xxxx[H]
—
HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto15alphanumeric
characters
DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojec-
tor.
Upto60alphanumeric
characters
SENDER'SAD-
DRESS
Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-
mericcharactersand
symbols
SMTPSERVER
NAME
TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojec-
tor.
Upto60alphanumeric
characters
RECIPIENT'SAD-
DRESS1,2,3
Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-
mericcharactersand
symbols
TESTMAIL
Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.
NOTE:
• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceivean
Alert mail.Should this happen,check if theRecipient’s Addressis
correctly set.
• Unless any one of the [SENDER'S ADDRESS], [SMTP SERVER'S
NAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]is
notavailable.
• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting
[TESTMAIL].
—
148
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORKSERVICE(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumeric
characters
PJLink
This option allows you to set apassword when youuse the
PJLinkfeature.
NOTE:
• Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,
consult with your dealer.
• WhatisPJLink?
PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors
of different manufacturers. This standard protocol is established by
JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-
tion(JBMIA)in2005.
TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.
• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom
the menu.
Upto32alphanumeric
characters
AMX Tur nonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhen
connectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrol
system.
TIP:
WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinx
controlsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriate
DeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.
Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device
Discovery�
Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX
Device Discovery�
—
149
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TOOLS
ADMINISTRATOR MODE
ThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.
MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.
(→page94)
—
NOTSAVESETTING
VALUES
Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings�
Clear this check box to save your projector settings�
—
NEWPASSWORD/
CONFIRMPASS-
WORD
Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumeric
characters
NOTE:
When[LAST]isselectedfor[DEFAULTSOURCESELECT],placingacheckmarkfor[NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES]willforcibly
selectNETWORKforsourceateverypower-ontime.
Toavoidthis,select[AUTO]for[DEFAULTSOURCESELECT]beforeplacingacheckmarkfor[NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES].
TIP:
ToreturntotheADVANCEDmenufromtheBASICmenu,dothefollowing:
1. UsetheSOURCEbuttononthecabinetorpresstheNETWORKbuttonontheremotecontroltoselect
[NETWORK]todisplaytheAPPLICATIONMENU.
2. Select[TOOLS]→[ADMINISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE]→[ADVANCEDMODE].
150
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROGRAM TIMER
Thisoptionturnson/offtheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsECOmodeautomaticallyataspecied
time.
NOTE:
• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→ page 153)
• MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected.
• Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabouttwoweeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemain
power is not supplied to the projector for two weeks or more, the built-in clock stops working.
• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isenabled,the[STANDBYMODE]settingbecomesinvalid.
Thismeansthattheprojectorisinthesameconditionwhenthe[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE].
Setting a new program timer
1. OnthePROGRAMTIMERscreen,usethe▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbut-
ton.
The[PROGRAMLIST]screenwillbedisplayed.
2. SelectablankprogramnumberandpresstheENTERbutton.
The[EDIT]screenwillbedisplayed.
3. Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.
ACTIVE ������������������ Place a check mark to enable the program�
DAY ������������������������ Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-
151
5. Using On-Screen Menu
FRI]�To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�
TIME ���������������������� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�
FUNCTION ������������� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting
[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [SOURCE] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED
SETTINGS]� Selecting [ECO MODE] will allow you to select [ECO MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SET-
TINGS]�
ADVANCED SETTINGS
������������������������������ Select power on/off, a type of video source, or ECO MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�
REPEAT ������������������ Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the
check mark�
4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
This will complete the settings.
Yo u willbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.
5. Select[BACK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Yo u willbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.
6. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
You will be returned to the [TOOLS] screen.
NOTE:
• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.
• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingisignored.
• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.
• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe
cleared automatically and the program will be disabled.
• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.
• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.
• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.
• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted
until the power off becomes possible.
• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]
ofthe
[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris
enabled.
• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit
manuallysoasnottoleavetheprojectoronforalongperiodoftime.
152
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Activating the program timer
1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.
The [ENABLE] will be activated.
2. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The[PROGRAMTIMER]screenwillbechangedtothe[TOOL]screen.
NOTE:
• Clearing[ENABLE]willdisabletheProgramTimerevenwhenaprogramismarkedwithacheckmarkon[PROGRAMLIST]
screen.
• When[ENABLE]isselected,the[PROGRAMLIST]cannotbeedited.Toedittheprograms,select[ENABLE]toturnofftheProgram
Timer.
Changing the programmed settings
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.
2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.
3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The programmed settings will be changed.
Yo u willbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.
Changing the order of programs
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶but-
ton.
2. Pressthe▼buttontoselect▲ or ▼.
3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.
The order of the programs will be changed.
Deleting the programs
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶button.
2. Pressthe▼buttontoselect[DELETE].
3. PresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The program will be deleted.
This will complete deleting the program.
153
5. Using On-Screen Menu
DATE AND TIME
Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.
NOTE: The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about 2 weeks after the main power is turned off. If the
main power is off for 2 weeks or more, the built-in clock will cease. If the built-in clock ceases, set the date and time again. The
built-in clock will not cease while in the standby mode.
TIME ZONE SETTINGS
�������������� Select your time zone�
DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ������ Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)�
INTERNET TIME SERVER ��������� If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be synchronized with an Internet
time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�
UPDATE ������������������������������������ Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available
unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�
SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ������� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�
MOUSE
ThisoptionletsyoutochangeyourUSBmousesettings.ThemousesettingsfeatureisavailableforUSBmouseonly.
Choosethesettingsyouwant:
MOUSE BUTTON ���������������������� [RIGHT HAND] or [LEFT HAND]
MOUSE SENSITIVITY ��������������� [FAST], [MEDIUM] or [SLOW]
154
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Mounting a lens (sold separately)
Sixseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedwiththisprojector.ThedescriptionsherearefortheNP18ZL(1.3x
zoom)lens.Mountotherlensesinthesamemanner.
NOTE:
• Theprojectorandlensesaremadeofprecisionparts.Donotsubjectthemtoshockorexcessiveforces.
• Removetheseparatelysoldlenswhenmovingtheprojector.Ifnot,thelenscouldbesubjecttoshockwhiletheprojectorisbeing
moved,damagingthelensandthelensshiftmechanism.
• Turnoffthepowerandwaitforthecoolingfantostopandturnoffthemainpowerswitchbeforemountingorremovingthe
lens.
• Whendismountingthelensfromtheprojector,returnthelenspositiontothehomepositionbeforeturningoffthepower.Failureto
dosomaypreventthelensfrombeingmountedordismountedbecauseofnarrowspacebetweentheprojectorandthelens.
• Nevertouchthelenssurfacewhiletheprojectorisoperating.
• Beverycarefulnottoletdirt,grease,etc.,onthelenssurfaceandnottoscratchthelenssurface.
• Performtheseoperationsonaatsurfaceoverapieceofcloth,etc.,topreventthelensfromgettingscratched.
• Whenleavingthelensofftheprojector
for
longperiodsoftime,mountthedustcapontheprojectortopreventdustordirtfrom
getting inside.
• Ifyouhavemultipleprojectors,becarefulofthefollowing:
Thefollowinglensesdesignedexclusivelyforthisprojectorcannotmountedontoanotherprojector.
- NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL
Mounting the lens
1. Removethedustcapfromtheprojector.
2. Removethelenscaponthebackofthelens.
• ThelensNP18ZLisusedasanexample.
3. Insertthelensontotheprojectorwiththearrowmarkin
thelabelonthelensfacingupwards.
Insertthelensslowlyallthewayin,keepingthepositioning
slit at the same angle.
Arrow mark
155
4.Turnthelensclockwise.
Turn until a click is heard.
The lens is now fastened onto the projector.
TIP:Mountingthelenstheftpreventionscrew
Fastenthelenstheftpreventionscrewincludedwiththeprojectortothe
bottomoftheprojectorsothatthelenscannotberemovedeasily.
Removing the lens
Before removing the lens:
1. Turnontheprojectoranddisplayanimage.(→page16)
2. PressandholdtheSHUTTER/HOMEPOSITIONbuttonfor2seconds.
The lens position will be moved to the home position.
3. Turnofftheprojector,turnoffthemainpowerswitch,andthenunplugthepowercord.
4. Waituntiltheprojectorcabinetiscoolenoughtohandle.
1. Whilepressingthelensreleasebuttonontheprojector’s
frontpanelfullyin,turnthelenscounterclockwise.
The lens comes off.
NOTE: Ifthe lenscannot be removedwhen thelens release (PUSH
RELEASE LENS) button is pressed,check whether the lens theft
preventionscrewismounted.
2. Slowlypullthelensofftheprojector.
- After removing the lens, mount the lens caps (front and
back) included with the lens before storing the lens.
- Ifnolensisgoingtobemountedontheprojector,mount
the dust cap included with the projector.
156
6. Installation and Connections
COMPUTER 2 IN
COMPUTER 3 IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
Computercable(VGA)(supplied)
To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector
ontheprojector.Itisrecommend-
ed that you use a commercially
available distribution amplifier if
connecting a signal cable longer
than the cable supplied.
NOTE:ForMacintosh,useacommerciallyavailablepinadapter(not
supplied)toconnecttoyourMac’svideoport.
RGB-to-BNCcable(not
supplied)
Making Connections
Theprojectorcanbeconnectedtoacomputerusingthecomputercable,a5xBNCcable,HDMIcableorDisplayPort
cable.
Preparecommerciallyavailablecablesforconnection.
Analog RGB signal connection
• Connectthecomputercablebetweenthecomputer’sdisplayoutputconnector(miniD-Sub15-pin)andtheprojector’s
Computer1orComputer2videoinputconnector.
• Whenconnectingthecomputer’sdisplayoutputconnector(miniD-Sub15-pin)andtheprojector’sComputer3
videoinputconnector,useaBNCcable(5-core)→miniD-Sub15-pinconvertercable.
• Tooutputaudiofromthecomputer,usecommerciallyavailableaudiosystem.
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTER1IN
COMPUTER1 COMPUTER1
COMPUTER2IN
COMPUTER2 COMPUTER2
COMPUTER3IN
COMPUTER3
COMPUTER3
157
6. Installation and Connections
DisplayPort IN
HDMI IN
Digital RGB signal connection
• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputconnectorandtheprojector’s
HDMIinputconnector.
• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputconnectorand
theprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector.
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
HDMIIN
HDMI HDMI
DisplayPortIN
DisplayPort DisplayPort
NOTE:
• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnecting.
• ThisprojectordoesnotsupportNECvideounit(modelISS-6020)videodecoded outputs.
• When avideo deckis connected viaa scan converter, etc., the displaymay not be correctduring fast-forwarding and
rewinding.
TIP
• TheComputer1andComputer2videoinputconnectorssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.TheComputer3videoinputconnector
doesnotsupportWindowsPlugandPlay.
• AMacintoshsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMacintoshcomputer.
ToconnectaMacintoshcomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort
→DisplayPortconvertercable.
HDMIcable(notsupplied)
DisplayPort cable (not supplied)
158
6. Installation and Connections
Cautions when connecting an HDMI cable
• UseacertiedHighSpeedHDMI
®
CableorHighSpeedHDMI
®
CablewithEthernet.
Cautions when connecting a DisplayPort cable
• UseacertiedDisplayPortcable.
• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.
• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.
• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sconnector,thenpullthecableout.
• NopowerissuppliedfromtheDisplayPortinputconnectortotheconnecteddevice.
• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,
insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.
• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,useaconverter(commercially
available).
CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal
• WhenthecomputerhasaDVIoutputconnector,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercabletoconnectthe
computertotheprojector’sHDMIinputconnector(onlydigitalvideosignalscanbeinput).
Toconnectthecomputer’sDVIoutputconnectortotheprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector,useacommercially
availableconverter.
HDMI IN
NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal
• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-
dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.
• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.
• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMIinput.Finally,turnonyourPC.
Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,
restartyourPC.
• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subconnectormay
result in no picture being displayed from the digital output of the graphics card.
• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojectorisrunning.Ifthesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthen
reconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.
159
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting an External Monitor
Youcanconnectaseparate,externalmonitortoyourprojectortosimultaneouslyviewonamonitorthecomputer
analogimageyou’reprojecting.
NOTE:
• Daisychainconnectionisnotpossible.
• ThesignalonlyfromtheCOMPUTER1INconnectorwillbeoutputtotheMONITOROUT(COMP1)connector.
• When[POWER-SAVING]or[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]withintheon-screenmenu,thesignalwill
notbeoutputtotheMONITOROUT(COMP1)connectorinstandby.
• WhenthesignalfromtheCOMPUTER3INconnectorsisprojected,novideosignalwillbeoutputtotheMONITOROUT(COMP1)
connector.
Computercable(VGA)
(supplied)
Computercable(VGA)
(not supplied)
160
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting Your DVD Player or Other AV Equipment
ConnectingVideo/S-VideoInput
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
VIDEOIN
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEOIN
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
NOTE:RefertoyourVCRowner’smanualformoreinformationaboutyourequipment’svideooutputrequirements.
NOTE:
• AnimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhenaVideoorS-Videosourceisplayedbackinfast-forwardorfast-rewindviaascan
converter.
• Videosignalscanbeprojectedwhenavideocable(commerciallyavailable)isconnectedtotheComputer3videoinputconnector’s
G/Yconnector.
Inthiscase,settheon-screenmenu’sSETUP→OPTION(1)→ SIGNALSELECT(COMP3) to [VIDEO]andselectComputer3for
the input selection.
Video cable (not supplied)
BNC (male) to RCA (female)
adapter (not supplied)
S-Video cable (not supplied)
Audio equipment
Audio cable (not supplied)
161
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting Component Input
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTER1IN
COMPUTER1 COMPUTER1
COMPUTER2IN
COMPUTER2 COMPUTER2
COMPUTER3IN
COMPUTER3
COMPUTER3
NOTE:
• Normallythecomputersignalandcomponentsignalareidentiedandswitchedautomatically.Ifthesignalcannotbeidentied,
however,selectthesignalat[ADJUST]→[VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]ontheprojector’son-screenmenu.Select“COMPUTER”or
“VIDEO”fortheComputer3videoinputconnectorat[SETUP]→[OPTION(1)]→[SIGNALSELECT(COMP3)](→ page 122).
• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDconnector,usethesoldseparatelyDconnectorconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).
15-pin - to - RCA (female) × 3 cable adapter
(ADP-CV1E)
BNC (male) to RCA (female)
adapter (not supplied)
Component video RCA × 3 cable (not supplied)
DVD player
Audio Equipment
162
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting HDMI Input
YoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourDVDplayer,harddiskplayer,Blu-rayplayer,ornotebooktypePCtothe
HDMIINconnectorofyourprojector.
NOTE:TheHDMIINconnectorsupportsPlug&Play(DDC2B).
Audio cable (not supplied)
HDMIcable(notsupplied)
UseHighSpeedHDMI
®
Cable.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
HDMIIN
HDMI HDMI
TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIconnector:
Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.
Thiswillprovideimprovedimagecontrastandmoredetaileddarkareas.
Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.
• WhenconnectingtheHDMIINconnectoroftheprojectortotheDVDplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbe
madesettingsinaccordancewiththeDVDplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[HDMISETTINGS]→[VIDEO
LEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.
163
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting to a Wired LAN
TheprojectorcomesstandardwithaLANport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.
TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[APPLICATIONMENU]→
[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page134).
Example of LAN connection
ExampleofwiredLANconnection
Server
Hub
LAN cable (not supplied)
NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.
164
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (sold separately)
TheseparatelysoldwirelessLANunitallowsyoutouseawirelessLANenvironment.Whenusingtheprojectorina
wirelessLANenvironment,theIPaddressandothersettingsmustbemadeontheprojector.
Important:
• IfyouusetheprojectorwiththeUSBWirelessLANUnitintheareawheretheuseofwirelessLANequipmentis
prohibited,removetheUSBWirelessLANUnitfromtheprojector.
• BuytheappropriateUSBWirelessLANUnitforyourcountryorarea.
NOTE:
• ThegreenLEDontheUSBWirelessLANUnitashestoshowthattheUSBWirelessLANUnitisworking.
• Yourcomputer’swirelessLANadapter(orunit)mustbecompliedwithWi-Fi(IEEE802.11b/g/n)standard.
Flow of Setting Wireless LAN
Step1: AttachtheUSBWirelessLANUnittotheprojector.(→page165)
Step2: Display[NETWORKSETTINGS]from[APPLICATIONMENU].(→page133)
Step3: Select[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]andset[EASYCONNECTION],
[PROFILE1],or[PROFILE2].(→page134)
TIP:
AccesstheHTTPserverfunctiontoset[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[SETTINGS]→[WIRELESS]→[EASYCONNECTION],[PRO-
FILE1],[PROFILE2].
Mounting a wireless LAN unit
NOTE:
• ThewirelessLANunithasafrontandabackandmustbemountedinthewirelessLANport
inaspecicdirection.Theportis
designed so that the unit cannot be mounted in the opposite direction, but trying to push it in by force could damage the wireless
LANunitport.
• Topreventdamageduetostaticelectricity,touchanearbymetalobject(adoorknob,aluminumsash,etc.)beforetouchingthe
wirelessLANunittoeliminatethestaticelectricityfromyourbody.
• TurnoffthemainpowerbeforemountingandremovingthewirelessLANunit.
MountingandremovingthewirelessLANunitwhiletheprojector’spowerisoncoulddamagethewirelessLANunitorresultin
malfunctionontheprojector.Iftheprojectorshouldmalfunction,turnofftheprojector’spower,turnoffthemainpowerswitch,
and unplug the power cord, then plug the power cord back in.
• DonotconnectanyUSBdeviceotherthanthewirelessLANunittotheUSB(LAN)port.Also,donotconnectthewirelessLAN
unittotheUSBportintheconnectorsection.
165
6. Installation and Connections
1. Pressthe buttontosettheprojectortothestandbymode,then
turnoffthemainpowerswitch.
2. Removetheplate(portcover).
Loosen the screw security port cover.
• Thescrewisnotremovable.
3. SlowlyinsertthewirelessLANunitintotheUSB(LAN)port.
- Remove the wireless LAN unit’s cap, set the unit with the front (the
side with the indicator) facing upwards, hold the back edge and
insert the unit gently.
Next, press the wireless LAN unit in with a finger.
- The cap you have removed will be used when the wireless LAN unit
is removed, so store it in a safe place.
NOTE:IfthewirelessLANunitishardtoinsert,donotpushitinbyforce.
4. Attachtheanti-theftcapforwirelessLANunit.
Use the screw you removed at Step 2 to secure the anti-theft cap.
Plate
166
6. Installation and Connections
To remove the wireless LAN unit
1. Pressthe buttontosettheprojectortothestandbymode,then
turnoffthemainpowerswitch.
2. Removetheanti-theftcap.
Loosen the screw and remove the anti-theft cap for the Wireless LAN
Unit.
3. PullouttheWirelessLANUnitfromtheUSB(LAN)port.
167
6. Installation and Connections
ExampleofwirelessLANconnection
(NetworkType→Infrastructure)
(→page136)
PC with wireless LAN card
inserted
PC with built-in wireless LAN
function
Wired LAN
Wireless access point
USB Wireless LAN Unit
Toenabledirectcommunication(i.e.,peer-to-peer)betweencomputersandprojectors,youneedtoselecttheAd
Hocmode.(→page136)
PC with wireless LAN card
inserted
PC with built-in wireless LAN
function
ExampleofwirelessLANconnection(NetworkType→AdHoc)
USB Wireless LAN Unit
168
6. Installation and Connections
Stacking projectors
Theprojectedimagebrightnesscanbedoubledbygravitystackinguptotwoprojectorswithoutexternalsupport.This
iscalled“StackingProjection”.
CAUTION:
Aminimumoftwopersonsarerequiredtocarrytheprojector.Otherwisetheprojectormaytumbleordrop,causing
personalinjury.
NOTE:
• Projectorswithdifferentmodelnumberscannotbegravitystacked.
Optional lenses with the same model numbers must be used for stacking projection.
• Forstackingprojectors,attachthesuppliedthreestackingholderstothetopofthelowerprojector.(→ next page)
• Thestackingprojectiondoesnotsupportaccuracyforoverlayingtwoimagesperfectlysothatsmalltextanddetailedgraphics
can be clearly read or seen.
• Useacommerciallyavailabledistributionampliertoboththeprimary(upper)andthesecondary(lower)projectorstodistribute
signal to two outputs of the two projectors.
• Notesforstacking
- Askyourservicepersonforsettingupandadjustingprojectors.
- Setuptheprojectorsinaplaceorstructureinawaywithsufcientstrengthtosupportthecombinedweightofthetwoprojec-
tors.Thesingleprojectorwithalensweighsuptoapproximately21kg/47lbs.
- Topreventtheprojectorsfromfalling,fastentheminawaytowithstandearthquakes.
- Doublestackingwillcauseroomtemperaturetoincrease.Ventilatetheroomwell.
- Donotattempttostackprojectorsontheceiling.Gravitystackingcannotbedoneontheceiling.
- Warmuptheprojectorsforonehourbeforethedesiredprojectionisobtained.
- Makesurethatthepositionoftheupper
projector
doesnotexceeditsspecications.Whensettingupthetwoprojectors,
adjustable height range for the tilt feet on the upper projector is added to the total adjustable range.
- Setuptheprojectorssothattheprojectedimageshowsaslittlegeometricdistortionsaspossible.Thelensisdifferentin
geometricdistortionbetweenwide(+)andtele(−)forzoom.
- Adjustthehorizontallensshifttothelenscenter.
s
169
6. Installation and Connections
AttachingStackingHolders
Attachthreestackingholderstothreelocationsonthetopofthelowerprojector.
Preparation:
ToolsrequiredarePhillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)andthreestackingholderspackagedwiththeprojector.
Loosenthetiltfeet(threelocations)oftheprojector.
1. Removerubbercapsandscrewsatthreelocations.
(1) Use your tweezers or nail to pinch and pull up the rubber cap.
(2) Remove the screw from a square hole.
(1) (2)
2. Attachthethreestackingholdersatthreelocations.
(1) Place a stacking holder in a square hole.
(2) Use the screw removed at Step 1 to fix the stacking holder in the square hole.
(3) Put the rubber cap removed at Step 1 back into the square hole.
• Snapthetabsonbothoftherubbercapintotheslitsonbothsidesinthesquarehole.
(1) (2) (3)
170
6. Installation and Connections
3. Putanotherprojectorontherstprojector.
Put each tilt foot of the upper projector on the stacking holders (three locations).
• Eachtiltfoothasarubber.Placeeachtiltfootrubberonstackingholders(threelocations).
Foot rubber
TIP:
• Toremovethestackingholders,performtheabovestepsinreverseorder.
171
Thissectiondescribesthesimplemaintenanceproceduresyoushouldfollowtocleanthelters,thelens,thecabinet,
andtoreplacethelampandthelters.
1 Cleaning the Filters
Theair-lterspongekeepsdustanddirtfromgettinginsidetheprojectorandshouldbefrequentlycleaned.Ifthelter
isdirtyorclogged,yourprojectormayoverheat.
NOTE:Themessageforltercleaningwillbedisplayedforoneminuteaftertheprojectoristurnedonoroff.Whenthemessageis
displayed,cleanthelters.Thetimetocleantheltersissetto[OFF]attimeofshipment.(→ page 115)
To cancel the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
CAUTION
• Beforecleaningthelters,turnofftheprojector,disconnectthepowercordandthenallowthecabinettocool.
Failuretodosocanresultinelectricshockorburninjuries.
Preparation:Beforecleaningthelters,useavacuumcleanertocleantheventilations(inlet).
Therearetwoltersonthefront(frontlter)andleftside(sidelter).
Whenreplacingthelters,buytheoptionallterNP02FTinadvance.
Filter cover
Inlet
(The small filter is inside)
Filter cover
Inlet
(The large filter is inside.)
1. Pushthepositionsshown(2locations)toreleasetheltercoverandremoveit.
Filter cover
Buttons
2. Removethetwoltersbypullingout.
Filter unit
7. Maintenance
172
7. Maintenance
3. Useavacuumcleanertovacuumallthedustinside.
Getridofdustintheaccordionlter
NOTE:
• Wheneveryouvacuumthelter,usethesoftbrushattachmenttovacuum.Thisistoavoiddamagetothelter.
• Donotwashthelterwithwater.Doingsocanresultinlterclogging.
4. Puttheltersbackintoplace
The filter cannot be inserted from the outside.
Insertthelterwith“↓AIRFLOW↓” facing the projector.
5. Puttheltercoverbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
Insertthecatchesonthetopandbottomoftheltercoverintothegroovesintheprojector,thenpressthetopand
bottom buttons to close.
• Pushtheltercoveruntilitclicksintoplace.
ButtonsCatches
6. Clearthelterusagehours:
Plug the power cord into the wall outlet, turn on the main power switch, and then turn on the projector.
From the menu, select [RESET] →[CLEARFILTERHOURS].andresetthelterusagehours.(→ page 130)
173
7. Maintenance
Cleaning the Lens
• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.
• Useablowerorlenspapertocleanthelens,andbecarefulnottoscratchormarthelens.
Cleaning the Cabinet
Tur nofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.
• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.
Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.
• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.
• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuum
cleanerintotheslitsofthecabinet.
Vacuum the dust off the ventilation slits.
• Cloggedventilationslitsmaycauseariseintheinternaltemperatureoftheprojector,resultinginmalfunction.
• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourngersoranyhardobjects
• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.
NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproduct
inprolongedcontactwithit.Otherwisethesurfacenishwillbedeterioratedorthecoatingmaybestrippedoff.
174
7. Maintenance
Replacing the Lamp and the Filters
Whenthelampreachestheendofitslife,theLAMPindicatorinthecabinetwillblinkredandthemessage“THE
LAMPHASREACHEDTHEENDOFITSUSABLELIFE.PLEASEREPLACETHELAMPANDFILTER.USETHE
SPECIFIEDLAMPFORSAFETYANDPERFORMANCE.”willappear(*).Eventhoughthelampmaystillbeworking,
replacethelamptomaintaintheoptimalprojectorperformance.Afterreplacingthelamp,besuretoclearthelamp
hourmeter.(→page129)
CAUTION
• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Tur ntheprojector
offandthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.
• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.
• DONOTREMOVEANYSCREWSexcepttwo(2)lampcoverscrewandthree(3)lamphousingscrews.Yo ucould
receiveanelectricshock.
• Donotbreaktheglassonthelamphousing.
Keepngerprintsofftheglasssurfaceonthelamphousing.Leavingngerprintsontheglasssurfacemightcause
anunwantedshadowandpoorpicturequality.
• Theprojectorwillturnoffandgointostandbymodewhenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hours
afterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife.Ifthishappens,besuretoreplacethelamp.Ifyoucontinuetouse
thelampafterthelampreachestheendofitslife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescattered
inthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.Ifthishappens,contactyourNEC
dealerforlampreplacement.
*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions:
• foroneminute
aftertheprojectorhasbeenpoweredon
•
whenthe
(POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinetorthePOWEROFFbuttonontheremotecontrolispressed
To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
Optionallampandtoolsneededforreplacement:
• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
• Replacementlamp:
NP22LP
Flow of Replacing the Lamp and the Filters
Thefollowingprocedureisanexampleforreplacingbothlamps.
Step 1. Replacethelamp
Step 2. Replacethelters(→page177)
Step 3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthelterusagehours(→page129, 130)
175
7. Maintenance
To replace the lamp:
1. Removethelampcover.
(1)Loosenthetwolampcoverscrews.
•Thelampcoverscrewisnotremovable.
(2)Pullthelampcovertowardsyouandremoveit.
2. Removethelamphousing.
(1)Loosenthethreescrewssecuringthelamphousinguntilthephillipsscrewdrivergoesintoafreewheelingcondi-
tion.
•Thethreescrewsarenotremovable.
•Thereisaninterlockonthiscasetopreventtheriskofelectricalshock.Donotattempttocircumventthis
interlock.
(2)Removethelamphousingbyholdingit.
CAUTION:
Makesurethatthelamphousingiscoolenoughtohandlebeforeremovingit.
Exhaust fan power con-
nector
Handle
176
7. Maintenance
3. Installanewlamphousing.
(1)Insertanewlamphousinguntilthelamphousingispluggedintothesocket.
(2)Secureitinplacewiththethreescrews.
•Besuretotightenthescrews.
NOTE:
• BesuretoinstallbothLamp1andLamp2.Theprojectorwillnotturnonunlessboththelampsareinstalled.
Alignment hole
Guidepin
4. Reattachthelampcover.
(1)Replacethelampcover.
(2)Tightenthetwoscrewstosecurethelampcover.
•Besuretotightenthescrews.
Guidepipe
Guidepin
Frame
Wire
This completes the lamp replacement.
Go on to the filter replacement.
NOTE:Whenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife,bothLAMP1
andLAMP2indicatorswilllightredandtheprojectorcannotturnonandthemenuisnotdisplayed.
Ifthishappens,presstheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbackto zero.
Whenthelamptimeclockisresettozero,theLAMPindicatorgoesout.Whenonlyonelampisreplaced,select[RESET]fromthe
menutoresetthelamphourused.DonotpresstheHELPbutton.
177
7. Maintenance
Replacing the Filters
Therearetwolters,onelocatedatthefrontoftheprojectorandoneontheside.
Optionallters(twolter)areavailable.
Smalloneforthefront
Largeonefortheleftside
NOTE:
• Replacebothlterswiththenewonesatthesametime.
• Beforereplacingthelters,useavacuumcleanertovacuumdustanddirtfromthevents(inlet)oftheprojectoranduseadry
soft cloth to wipe dust off the cabinet.
• Theprojectorcontainshigh-precisionparts.Keepoutdustanddirtduringlterreplacement.
• Donotwashthelterwithwater.Waterwilldamagetheltermembrane.
• Attachthelterinthecorrectorientation.Failuretodosomaycausedustanddirttoenterinsidetheprojector,resultinginprojec-
tor malfunction.
Filter cover
Inlet
(The small filter is inside)
Filter cover
Inlet
(The large filter is inside.)
To replace the filters:
1. Pushthepositionsshown(2locations)toreleasetheltercoverandremoveit.
Filter cover
Buttons
2. Removethetwoltersbypullingout.
Filter unit
178
7. Maintenance
3. Insertnewlters.
4. Puttheltercoverbackin.
ButtonsCatches
This completes the filter replacement.
Go on to the clearing lamp and filter hour meters.
To clear the lamp usage hours and the filter usage hours:
1. Placetheprojectorwhereyouuseit.
2. Plugthepowercordintothewalloutlet,andthenturnontheprojector.
3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthelterusagehours.
1. From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] and reset the lamp usage hours.
2. Select[CLEARFILTERHOURS].andresetthelterusagehours.(→ page 130)
179
8. User Supportware
Installing Software Program
Installation for Windows software
ThesoftwareprogramsexceptImageExpressUtility2forMacsupportWindows7,WindowsVista,andWindows
XP.
NOTE:
• Toinstalloruninstalleachsoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows7,Win-
dowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).
• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.
• TorunVirtualRemoteToolorPCControlUtilityPro4onWindowsXPHomeEditionandWindowsXPProfessional,“Microsoft
.NETFrameworkVersion2.0orlater”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0orlaterisavailablefromMicrosoft’s
web page. Download and install it on your computer
ImageExpressUtility2.0/PCControlUtilityPro4
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
TIP:
If the menu window will not be displayed, try the following procedure.
ForWindows7
1. Click“start”onWindows.
2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\
LAUNCHER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
the menu window will be displayed.
180
8. User Supportware
2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.
TIP:
Uninstalling a Software Program
Preparation:
Exitthesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstallthesoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave
“Administrator”privilege(Windows7andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).
•ForWindows7/WindowsVista
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”
The “Programs and Features” window will be displayed.
3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.
4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.
•Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
•ForWindowsXP
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.
The Add / Remove Programs window will be displayed.
3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
181
8. User Supportware
VirtualRemoteTool/ViewerPPTConverter3.0
1. Connect your computer to the internet and visit our website (http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.
html).
2. Download“VirtualRemoteTool”or“ViewerPPTConverter3.0”from“Download”andsavean“.exe”leto
yourcomputer.
File name is different depending on the version of the software program.
3. Clickthe“.exe”le.
The installation will start.
Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation.
182
8. User Supportware
Installation for Macintosh software
ImageExpressUtility2forMacsupportsMacOSX.
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
2 Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.
3 Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.
4 Double-click“ImageExpressUtility2(Intel).dmg”.
The“ImageExpressUtility2”folderwillbedisplayed.
• IfyourMacisPowerPC-based,double-click“ImageExpressUtility2.dmg”.
5 Movethe“ImageExpressUtility2”folderto“Applications”folderusingadrag-and-dropoperation.
TIP:
•Uninstallingasoftwareprogram
1. Putthe“ImageExpressUtility2”foldertotheTrashicon.
2. PutthecongurationleofImageExpressUtility2totheTrashicon.
• ThecongurationleofImageExpressUtility2islocatedin“/user/yourusername/library/Preferences/jp.co.
nec.nevt.ImageExpressUtility.plist”.
183
8. User Supportware
Projecting Images or Videos from the Projector over a LAN
(Image Express Utility 2.0)
What you can do with Image Express Utility 2.0
• UsingImageExpressUtility2.0allowsyoutosendthescreensofyourcomputerstotheprojectorviawired/wire-
lessLAN.
Theprojectedimagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsat
thesametime.
When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandreceivedbetweentwoormorecomputers.
• High-speed,high-qualityimagetransmissionsbasedonNEC’soriginalcompressionalgorithm
NEC’soriginalcompressionalgorithmallowshigh-qualityimagestobesentoverthenetworkathighspeed,from
yourcomputertotheprojector.
• Simultaneousprojectionbymultipleprojectors
Imagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesame
time.
• “EasyConnection”functionforconnectingwirelessLAN
Byusing“EasyConnection”function*
1
,thecomplicatedsettingofwirelessLANcanbesimplied.
*
1
ThisfunctioncanbeusedwhenWindowsXPisusedastheOSandwhenyouhavea“ComputerAdminis-
trator”privilege.IftheOSisWindows7/WindowsVista,inputoflogonpasswordas“Administrator”maybe
prompted.
184
8. User Supportware
• Projectedimagescanbetransferredandsavedtocomputers.
When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesenttothecomputersofalltheparticipants(attendants)
ofa“Meeting”.Thereceivedimagescanbesavedtoyourcomputerwithamemo(textdata)attached.
Presenter
Attendant
Attendant
Attendant
• 1-clickswitchingofpresenter
Whenswitchingtoanotherpresenterduringtheconference,theparticipants(attendants)cansimplyclickabutton
toswitchovertothenewpresenter.
• Centralmanagementoftheprojectingcomputer
UsingtheTrainingModeallowsyoutouseasinglecomputer(Manager)tomanagewhichcomputer(Attendant)
projects.Possibleoperationincludesswitchingprojectingcomputerstoprojectfrom,aswellastemporarilytermi-
natingcommunicationwiththeprojector.
Mr� D, please start
your presentation�
Manager
Attendant CAttendant B
Attendant D
(presenter)
Attendant A
NOTE::
TheTrainingModeisnotinstalledviathe“Typical”installationoptionwhenImageExpressUtility2.0isinstalled.
TouseTrainingMode,select“Extension”installationoptionontheinstallselectionscreenthatisdisplayedwhileImageExpress
Utility2.0installationisinprogress,andselect“TrainingMode(Attendant)”or“TrainingMode(Manager)”.
Connecting the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page163),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page164)and“9ApplicationMenus-NETWORKSETTINGS”(→page133)
185
8. User Supportware
Basic Operation of Image Express Utility 2.0
ThissectionexplainsthefollowingthreecasesasexamplesofoperatingImageExpressUtility2.0.
(1)Transferringimagestotheprojector
(2)Holdingaconference
(3)Participatinginaconference
Sending Images to Projector
•Connectingprojector
1 TurnonthepowertotheprojectorforwhichLANhasbeenset.
2 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]
→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.
The “Selection Of Network Connections” window will be displayed.
A list of the network equipment connected to your computer will be displayed.
IMPORTANT:
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
3 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].
Select the network device displaying “Easy Connection” if the product LAN setting is for “Easy Connection.” This
will call up the “Projector List” window.
186
8. User Supportware
4 Check( )theprojectortoconnectandclick[Connect].
Ifthenameoftheprojectortoconnectisnotonthelistorifitishidden,click[Update].
4-1
4-2
Click
Click
The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.
At this time, the input signal of the projector will automatically change to “NETWORK”.
NOTE:
• Whentheprojectorisfound,“1280×800”willbedisplayedintheresolutioneld.
•Transferringimages
Whenyourcomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thescreenofthecomputerisprojectedfromtheprojectorasis.To
makeyourpresentationbyusingaPowerPointle,openthePowerPointleandstartyourpresentation.
187
8. User Supportware
•Stoppingorresumingthetransmissionofimages
Thetransmissionofthescreenofthecomputertotheprojectorcanbetemporarilystoppedandthenresumed.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon(
)ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click[StopSending].
The projector icon on the taskbar will change (
→ ).
NOTE:
Evenifthescreenofthecomputerischangedinthisstatus,theimageprojectedfromtheprojectordoesnotchange.
Tomanipulatethescreenthatshouldnotbedisclosed(projectedfromtheprojector),stoptransmission.
3 Clicktheprojectoricon(
)ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
4 Click[StartSending].
The projector icon on the taskbar will change (
→ ).
The transmission of the screen for the computer will be resumed, and the current screen of the computer will be
projected from the projector.
•Endthetransmissionofimages
ExitImageExpressUtility2.0.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon(
)ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click[Exit].
188
8. User Supportware
Holding Conferences
•Holdingconferences
1 Followsteps1through4in“Connectingprojector”of“SendingImagestoProjector”(→page185).
The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.
•Disclosealetotheparticipantsoftheconference.
NOTE:
Todisclosealetotheparticipants,selectioncanbemadeonlyinfolderunits.
Therefore,afolderonlyhavinglesthatcanbedisclosedtotheparticipantsmustbecreatedinadvance.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon(
)ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Beforeclicking[SendtoPCandProjector],checkthatthereisa“•”markapplied.
3 Clickthe[ImageExpressUtility2.0]buttononthetaskbar.
The presenter window will be opened.
4 Click[SelectFolder].
4
Click
189
8. User Supportware
5 Selectafoldersavingtheletobedisclosedtotheparticipants,andclick[OK].
The file in the selected folder will be displayed in the list of files to transfer.
6 Click[Download].
The file will be shown to the participants.
NOTE:
Whenthecomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thecomputerscreenthatisinofbeingprogressisalsoprojectedfromtheprojec-
tor.Tomanipulateascreenthatshouldnotbeshown(notprojected),temporarilystopthetransmission(→ page 187).
•Endingconference
1 Click[File]inthepresenterwindow,andclick[Exit].
You can also end the conference by clicking [×] at the upper right of the presenter window.
Participating in Conference
•Participatinginconferences
1 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]
→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.
The “Selection Of Network Connections” window will be displayed.
A list of the network equipment connected to your computer will be displayed.
IMPORTANT:
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
2 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].
Select the network device displaying “Easy Connection” if the product LAN setting is for “Easy Connection.” This
will call up the “ Meeting List” window.
190
8. User Supportware
3 ClicktheMeetingNametoparticipate,andclick[Connect].
3
Click
The computer will be connected to the selected conference and the attendant window will be displayed.
Ifthepresenterselects“SendtoPCAndProjector”,theimageprojectedfromtheprojectorisdisplayedintheat-
tendant window.
191
8. User Supportware
•Savingreceivedimages
1 Click[Memo]intheattendantwindow.
A memo pane will be displayed.
2
1
Click
Memo pane
Click
2 Click[SaveImage]intheattendantwindow.
The image displayed in the attendant window will be saved.
• Thesavedimageisaddedtothememolistandathumbnailisdisplayed.
• Amemocanbeattachedtothesavedimage.
REFERENCE:
• IncaseofWindowsX P, acreatedleissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows
7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedle.
• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoaleinthe
created folder.
Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\
ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.
Inthisfolder,anHTMLlenamed“MeetingRecords”iscreated.
Thesavedimageissavedin“Images”folder.
192
8. User Supportware
•Downloadingdisclosedle
1 Click[FileTransfer]intheattendantwindow.
The “File Transfer” window will be opened.
1
Click
2 Selectaletodownload,andclick[Download].
Downloading will begin.
The progress of the downloading is displayed at the lower left of the window.
3 Whendownloadingiscomplete,click[File]inthe“FileTransfer”window,andclick[Exit].
The “File Transfer” window will be closed.
REFERENCE:
• If“OpenAfterDownloading”ischecked,theleisopenedbyspeciedWindowsapplicationsoftwareafterdownloadingiscom-
plete.
• IncaseofWindowsX P, acreatedleissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows
7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedle.
• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoaleinthe
created folder.
Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\
ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.
193
8. User Supportware
•Changingpresenter
Threetypesofsettingsmaybemadetochangethepresenter:“NotApproved”,“Approved”,and“ChangingProhibited”
(thesecanbeselectedonlybythepresenter).
Inthefollowingexample,“NotApproved”isselected.
• Click[BecomeAPresenter]intheattendantwindow.
You will change from a participant to a presenter.
1
Click
•Leavingconference
LeavetheconferenceandexitImageExpressUtility2.0.
• Click[File]intheattendantwindow,andclick[Exit].
You can also leave the conference by clicking [×] at the upper right of the attendant window.
194
8. User Supportware
Controlling the Projector over a LAN (PC Control Utility Pro 4)
Usingtheutilitysoftware“PCControlUtilityPro4”,theprojectorcanbecontrolledfromacomputeroveraLAN.
Control Functions
PowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,adjusting,errormessagenotication,eventschedule.
ScreenofPCControlUtilityPro4
ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofPCControlUtilityPro4.ForinformationonhowtousePC
ControlUtilityPro4,seeHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4.
TIP:
• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.
Connect the projector to a LAN.
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page163),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN(soldseparately)”(→page164)and“9ApplicationMenus-NETWORKSETTINGS”(→
page133)
Start PC Control Utility Pro 4
Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→
“PCControlUtilityPro4”.
NOTE:
• FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro4towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinstandby/
sleepmode.Select“PowerOptions”fromthe“ControlPanel”inWindowsanddisableitsstandby/sleepmodebeforerunningthe
scheduler.
[Example]ForWindows7:
Select“ControlPanel”→“SystemandSecurity”→“PowerOptions”→“Changewhenthecomputersleeps”→“Putthecomputer
to sleep” →“Never”.
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,the
projector
cannotbeturnedonviathenetwork
(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.
When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviawirelessLANconnection.
TIP:
ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4
• DisplayingtheHelpleofPCControlUtilityPro4whileitisrunning.
Click “Help (H)” → “Help (H) …” of window of PC Control Utility Pro 4 in this order.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
• DisplayingthehelpleusingtheStartMenu.
Click “Start” → “All programs” or “Programs” → “NEC Projector User Supportware” → “PC Control Utility Pro 4” →
“PC Control Utility Pro 4 Help”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
195
8. User Supportware
Projecting Your Mac’s Screen Image from the Projector over
a LAN (Image Express Utility 2 for Mac)
UsingImageExpressUtility2forMaccontainedallowsyoutosendtheMac’sscreenimagetotheprojectorovera
network(wiredorwirelessLAN).
ImageExpressUtility2forMacrunsonMacOSX10.2.8orlater.
ItrunsonbothMacOSX(PowerPC)andMacOSX(Intel).
Hereafter,“ImageExpressUtility2forMac”isabbreviatedas“ImageExpressUtility2”.
What you can do with Image Express Utility 2
• ViathenetworkimagesonthescreenofyourMaccanbesenttotheprojectorandprojectedonthescreen.
• Onecomputercansendimagestomorethanoneprojector.
Operating environment
Supported OS
MacOSX10.2.8orlaterrequired
MacOSX10.3.0orlaterrecommended
Processor (CPU)
PowerPCG3600MHzprocessorrequired
PowerPCG4800MHzorhigherrecommended
or
IntelCoreSolo1.5GHzorhigherrequired
Memory
256MBorhigherrequired
Networkenvironment
WiredorwirelessLANrequiredthatsupportsTCP/IP
OnlytheAirPortandAirPortExtremewirelessLANcardsareguaranteedtoworkwithImageExpressUtility2.
“EasyConnection”supportsonlyAirPortandAirPortExtreme.
Supported resolution
VGA(640×480)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
(1024×768-1280×800recommended)
Supported screen colors
32thousandsofcolors,16.7millioncolorsrequired
*256orfewercolorsarenotsupported.
Connecting the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page163),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page164)and“9ApplicationMenus-NETWORKSETTINGS”(→page133)
196
8. User Supportware
Using Image Express Utility 2
Connecting to a projector
1 Conrmthattheprojectorhasbeenturnedon.
2 ClicktheAirPortstatus(
)ontheMacintoshmenubar,andclick“TurnAirPortOn”.
The AirPort status is changed to “
” or “ ”.
• AirPortstatustypesandmeanings
...AirPort : Off
...AirPort : On ( in infrastructure connection )
...AirPort : On ( in adhoc connection )
REFERENCE:
When the AirPort status ( / / ) is not displayed on the menu bar:
1 ClickAppleMenu( )and[SystemPreferences...].
The “System Preferences” window will be displayed.
2 Click[Network].
The Network configuration window will be displayed.
3 Select[AirPort]in[Show].
4 Click[AirPort]tab.
The AirPort configuration item will be displayed.
5 Checkthe“ShowAirPortstatusinmenubar”checkboxatthebottomcongurationitem.
The AirPort status (
/ / ) will be displayed on the menu bar.
6 Clickthe[
]buttonattheupperleftontheNetworkcongurationwindow.
The Network configuration window will be closed.
197
8. User Supportware
3 Double-clickthe“ImageExpressUtility2”iconinthe“ImageExpressUtility2”folder.
• Attheinitialstart,the“LicenseAgreement”windowisdisplayed.
Thoroughlyreadtheagreementshownonthescreen,andclick“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”
and the [OK] button.
Next, the “Authenticate” window will be displayed.
4 EntertheadministratornameandpasswordofyourMacintoshcomputer,andclickthe[OK]button.
The [Projector Selection] window will be displayed.
5 Checkthe( )checkboxtotheleft oftheprojectornametoconnectandclick[Connect].
The Macintosh computer and the projector are connected via wireless LAN, and images on the Macintosh screen
are projected from the projector.
198
8. User Supportware
Stopping/RestartingImageTransmission
•Stoppingimagetransmission
1 Click[Tools]onthemenubar,andclick[StopSending].
Imagetransmissionistemporarilystopped.
•Restartingimagetransmission
1 Click[Tools]onthemenubar,andclick[StartSending].
Imagetransmissionisstartedagain.
Exiting Image Express Utility 2
1 Click[ImageExpressUtility2]onthemenubar,andclick[QuitImageExpressUtility2].
ImageExpressUtility2isexited.
199
8. User Supportware
Operating the Projector Via the LAN (Virtual Remote Tool)
Usingthesoftwareprogram“VirtualRemoteTool”thatyoucandownloadfromourwebsite,VirtualRemotescreen
(ortoolbar)canbedisplayedonyourcomputerscreen.
Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.It
isalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,you
canlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.
Control Functions
PowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremotecontrolop-
erationonyourPC.
VirtualRemotescreen
RemoteControlWindow Toolbar
ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofVirtualRemoteTool.
ForinformationonhowtouseVirtualRemoteTool,seeHelpofVirtualRemoteTool.(→page201)
NOTE:
• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions:
- Filesize:256KBorless
- Imagesize(resolution):thenativeresolutionofthe projector
- Fileformat:JPEG
• ThelogodatathatissentwithVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedatthecenterofthescreen.Itssurroundingwillbepainted
out in black.
• Onceyouhavechangedthebackgroundselectionfromthedefault“NEClogo”toanotherselection,youcannotreturnthelogoto
thedefault“NEClogo”evenafterusing[RESET].Toputthedefault“NEClogo”backinthebackgroundlogo,youneedtoregister
itasthebackgroundlogobyusingtheimagele(\Logo\NEC_logo_black_WUXGA.jpg)includedonthesuppliedNECProjector
CD-ROM.
TIP:
• VirtualRemoteToolcanbeusedalsowithaserialconnection.
• TodownloadorupdateVirtualRemoteTool,visitourwebsite:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
Connect the projector to a LAN.
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page163),“Con-
nectingtoaWireless
LAN(soldseparately)”(→page164)and“9ApplicationMenus-NETWORKSETTINGS”(→
page133)
200
8. User Supportware
Start Virtual Remote Tool
Start using the shortcut icon
• Double-clicktheshortcuticon ontheWindowsDesktop.
Start from the Start menu
• Click[Start]→[AllPrograms]or[Programs]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[VirtualRemoteTool]
→[VirtualRemoteTool].
When Virtual Remote Tool starts for the first time, “Easy Setup” window will be displayed.
The “Easy Setup” feature is not available on this model. Click “Close Easy Setup”.
Closing the “Easy Setup” window will display the “Projector List” window.
Select your projector you wish to connect. This will display the Virtual Remote screen.
TIP:
• TheVirtualRemoteToolscreen(orToolbar)canbedisplayedwithoutdisplaying“EasySetup”window.
To do so, click to place a check mark for “
DonotuseEasySetupnexttime”onthescreen.
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork
(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],theprojectorcannotbe
turnedonviawirelessLANconnection.
201
8. User Supportware
ExitingVirtualRemoteTool
1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon ontheTaskbar.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click“Exit”.
The Virtual Remote Tool will be closed.
ViewingthehelpleofVirtualRemoteTool
•Displayingthehelpleusingthetaskbar
1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon
onthetaskbarwhenVirtualRemoteToolisrunning.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
2. Click“Help”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
•DisplayingthehelpleusingtheStartMenu.
1. Click“Start”.“Allprograms”or“Programs”.“NECProjectorUserSupportware”.“VirtualRemoteTool”.and
then“VirtualRemoteToolHelp”inthisorder.
The Help screen will be displayed.
202
8. User Supportware
Converting PowerPoint files to Slides (Viewer PPT Converter
3.0)
UsingViewerPPTConverter3.0allowsyoutoconvertPowerPointlesintoJPEGles.ConvertedJPEGlesand
Indexles(.idx)canbesavedtoaUSBmemory.WhentheUSBmemoryinsertedintotheprojector,theseJPEGles
andIndexles(.idx)canbedisplayedwiththeviewerfunctionoftheprojectorwithoutconnectingacomputer.
NOTE:
WhenViewerPPTConverter3.0hasbeeninstalled,oncestartViewerPPTConverter3.0oncewiththeprivilegeusedforinstallation.
ThenexitfromViewerPPTConverter3.0withoutdoinganything.
•Starting
ClickWindow’s[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ViewerPPTConverter3.0]→[ViewerPPT
Converter3.0],inthatorder.
NOTE:
• WheninstallingViewerPPTConverter3.0ontoacomputerthathasPowerPointinstalled,ViewerPPTConverter3.0isautomati-
callyregisteredasaPower-Pointadd-in.
ItisnecessarytocancelViewerPPTConverter3.0add-inbeforeuninstallingViewerPPTConverter3.0.
RefertoViewerPPTConverter3.0Helptounregistertheadd-in.
• Theprojectordoesnotsupporttheadd-in's“RunSlideShow”.
Converting PowerPoint files and saving them to a USB memory
1. InserttheUSBmemoryintotheUSBportofthecomputer.
2. OnWindows,click“Start”→“Allprograms”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“ViewerPPTConverter
3.0”
→“ViewerPPTConverter3.0”.
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will start.
3. Click“Brows...”andselectaPowerPointleyouwishtoconvert,andthenclick“Open”.
4.Click“Next”.
203
8. User Supportware
5. SelecttheUSBmemorydrivefor“CardDrive”andtypein“Indexname”.
Indexnamemustbeeightalphanumericcharactersorless.2-bytecharacterandlewithalonglenamecannot
be used.
6. Click“Export”.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
7. Click“OK”.
Exporting a file will start.
8. Click“OK”.
9. Click“Exit”.
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will exit.
10.RemovetheUSBmemoryfromthecomputer.
NOTE:
• BeforeremovingtheUSBmemoryfromtheUSBportofthecomputer,clickthe“SafetoRemoveHardware”icononthetask-
bar.
204
9. Appendix
Throw distance and screen size
Sixseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedonthisprojector.Refertotheinformationonthispageandusealens
suitedfortheinstallationenvironment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstructionsonmountingthelens,see
page154.
Eachnumberprovidedinthetablebelowmeansthethrowdistancebetweenthelenssurfaceandthescreen.
Lens types and throw distance
unit=m
Screensize Lensmodelname
NP16FL NP17ZL NP18ZL NP19ZL NP20ZL NP21ZL
50" 0.8 1.3–1.9 1.8–2.4 2.4–4.0 3.8–5.8 5.6–8.9
60" 1.0 1.6–2.3 2.2–2.9 2.8–4.8 4.6–7.0 6.8–10.7
80" 1.3 2.2–3.1 3.0–3.9 3.8–6.4 6.2–9.3 9.1–14.4
100" 1.7 2.7–3.9 3.7–4.9 4.8–8.0 7.7–11.7 11.5–18.1
120" 2.0 3.3–4.7 4.5–5.9 5.8–9.6 9.3–14.1 13.8–21.7
150" 2.5 4.1–5.8 5.6–7.4 7.2–12.0 11.7–17.6 17.4–27.3
200" 3.4 5.5–7.8 7.5–9.9 9.7–16.1 15.6–23.5 23.3–36.4
240" 4.1 6.6–9.4 9.1–11.9 11.6–19.3 18.8–28.3 28.0–43.8
300" 5.1 8.2–11.7 11.3–14.9 14.5–24.1 23.5–35.4 35.0–54.8
TIP
Calculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensize
NP16FLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8:0.8m(min.)to5.1m(max.)
NP17ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.3toH×1.8:1.3m(min.)to11.7m(max.)
NP18ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.7toH×2.3:1.8m(min.)to14.9m(max.)
NP19ZLlensthrowdistance
(m)=H×2.2toH×3.7:2.4m(min.)to24.1m(max.)
NP20ZL
lensthrowdistance(m)=H×3.6toH×5.4:3.8m(min.)to35.4m(max.)
NP21ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×5.3toH×8.3:5.6m(min.)to54.8m(max.)
“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.
*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.
Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP18ZLlens:
Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 206),H(screenwidth)=323.1cm.
Thethrowdistanceis323.1cm×1.7to323.1cm×2.3=549.3cmto743.13cm(becauseofthezoomlens).
205
9. Appendix
Projection range for the different lenses
50-300"
50-300"
50-300"
50-300" 50-300" 50-300"
0.8–5.1m
NP16FL :
NP17ZL : 1.3–11.7m
NP18ZL : 1.8–14.9m
NP19ZL : 2.4–24.1m
NP20ZL : 3.8–35.4m
NP21ZL : 5.6–54.8 m
206
9. Appendix
Tables of screen sizes and dimensions
Screen
height
Screen width
16:10 screen size
(diagonal)
Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight
(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)
50 42.4 107.7 26.5 67.3
60 50.9 129.2 31.8 80.8
80 67.8 172.3 42.4 107.7
100 84.8 215.4 53.0 134.6
120 101.8 258.5 63.6 161.5
150 127.2 323.1 79.5 201.9
200 169.6 430.8 106.0 269.2
240 203.5 516.9 127.2 323.1
300 254.4 646.2 159.0 403.9
207
9. Appendix
Lens shifting range
ThisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebyusingtheLENS
SHIFT▼▲◀▶buttons.Thelenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.
Description of symbols:Vindicatesvertical (height of the projected image), H indicates horizontal (width of the
projectedimage).
NOTE:ThelensshiftfunctioncannotbeusedwhenusingtheNP16FLlens.
Desk/frontprojection
1V
1H
0.1H 0.1H
0.5V
Height of projected image
Width of projected image
Ceiling/frontprojector
1V
1H
0.1H 0.1H
0.5V
Height of projected image
Width of projected image
Ex.:Whenprojectingona150"screen
Accordingtothetablesofscreensizesanddimensionsfor16:10(→page206),H=323.1cm,V=201.9cm.
Adjustmentrangeintheverticaldirection:Theprojectedimagecanbemovedupwards0.5×201.9cm≈101cm,
(whenthelensisatthecenterposition).Foraceiling/frontinstallation,theaboveguresareinverted.
Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:Theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.1×323.1cm≈32cm,
totheright0.1×323.1cm≈32cm.
*Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.
208
9. Appendix
❷ Replacing the Color Wheel (included)
Theprojectorcomeswithacolorwheel(6-segmentWhite)installed.Anadditionalcolorwheel(6-segmentColor)is
includedwiththeaccessoriesthatcomewiththebox.Toreplacethecolorwheel,refertothefollowingguide.
CAUTION:
Beforereplacingthecolorwheel,besuretoturnofftheprojector,waituntilthecoolingfansstop,andturnoffthemain
powerswitch.Allow1hourbeforereplacingthecolorwheel.
• Donottouchthediskofthecolorwheel.Doingsomayscratchthediskorleavengerprints,causingtheimage
qualitytodegrade.
• Donotremovescrewsexceptwhenspeciedinthefollowinginstructions
• Heedthefollowinginformationifyouowntwoormoreprojectors:
Whenreplacingorre-installingthecolorwheel,theoriginalcolorwheelpreinstalledorsuppliedasanaccessory
mustgobacktoitsoriginalprojector.Yourcolorwheelandprojectorcolorwheelcoveraregivenanidentication
number.Besuretousethecolorwheelpre-installedorsuppliedwithyourprojectortomatchitsidentication
number.
Ifyouremoveacolorwheelfromoneprojectorandre-installitintoanotherprojector,performancemaybecom-
promised.
• Besureturnoffthemainpowerswitchbeforereplacingthecolor
wheel.F
ailuretodosomayresultinelectrical
shockordamagetotheprojector,andcauseanirregularcoloroftheprojectedimage.
Toolneeded:Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
1. Removethecolorwheelcover
• Loosenthescrewonthecolorwheelcover.
• Thescrewiscaptiveandnotremovable.
(shown from the rear side of the projector)
• Slideandremovethecolorwheelcover.
209
9. Appendix
2. Removethecolorwheel(6-segmentwhite).
• Loosenthefourscrewsonthecolorwheel.
• Thescrewsarecaptiveandnotremovable.
• Liftupthecolorwheel(6-segmentwhite)
3. Installthesuppliedcolorwheel(6-segementcolor).
• Insertthesuppliedcolorwheel.
• Tightenthefourscrewstosecurethecolorwheel.
• Besuretotightenthescrews.
210
9. Appendix
4. Replacethecolorwheelcover.
• Insertthetwotabsofthecolorwheelintothetwogroovesofthecabinet.
Tabs
Grooves
• Tightenthescrew.
• Besuretotightenthescrew.
NOTE:
Improper(loose)installationofthecolorwheelpreventsanimagefrombeingdisplayed.
Storing Unused Color Wheel:
Keeptheunusedcolorwheelinthezipperbaginwhichthesupplied6-segmentcolorwheelwaspackaged.Thisbag
preventsdustfromfallingorcollectingonthecolorwheel.
211
9. Appendix
❸ Mounting the Optional Board (sold separately)
CAUTION
Beforemountingorremovingtheoptionalboard,besuretoturnofftheprojector,waitforthefanstostopandturn
offthemainpowerswitch.
Toolneeded:Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
TheSB-01HCboardisusedasanexample.
1. Turnoffthemainpowerswitchoftheprojector.
2. Loosenthetwoscrewsontheslotcoveroftheterminalpanel.
Remove the two screws and the slot cover.
NOTE:Keepthetwoscrewsandtheslotcover.
3. Inserttheoptionalboardintotheslot.
Make sure that the board is inserted into the slot in the correct orientation.
Incorrectorientationmaycausemiscommunicationbetweentheoptionalboardandprojector.
212
9. Appendix
4. Tightenthetwoscrewsonbothsidesoftheslot.
This will complete installation of the optional board.
Refer to the user’s manual included with the board for source selection.
NOTE:
• Mountingtheoptionalboardmaycausethefanstoruninthestandbymodeforthepurposeofcoolingdependingontheoptional
board. The fan speed may also increase in order to cool the projector properly. Both of these instances are considered normal
and not a malfunction of the projector.
213
9. Appendix
Compatible Input Signal List
Analog RGB
Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMac
SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMac
XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMac
XGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 60/70/75/85
WXGA 1280 × 768 15 : 9 60
1280 × 800 16 : 10 60
1360 × 768 *
1
16 : 9 60
1366 × 768 *
1
16 : 9 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/75/85
SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75
WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60
WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60
UXGA 1600 × 1200 4 : 3 60/65/70/75
WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60
WUXGA 1920 × 1200 16 : 10
60(ReducedBlanking)
HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60
FullHD 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 60
MAC13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67
MAC16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75
MAC19" 1024 × 768 4 : 3 75
MAC21" 1152 × 870 *
2
4 : 3 75
MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65
HDMI
Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60
SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60
XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60
HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60
WXGA 1280 × 768 15 : 9 60
1280 × 800 16 : 10 60
1366 × 768 *
1
16 : 9 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60
SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60
WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60
WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60
WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60
UXGA 1600 × 1200 4 : 3 60
FullHD 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 60
WUXGA 1920 × 1200 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60
HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60
HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60
SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
SDTV(480i) 1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576i) 1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
214
9. Appendix
DisplayPort
Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60
SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60
XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60
HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60
WXGA 1280 × 768 15 : 9 60
1280 × 800 16 : 10 60
1366 × 768 *
1
16 : 9 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60
SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60
WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60
WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60
WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60
UXGA 1600 × 1200 4 : 3 60
FullHD 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 60
WUXGA 1920 × 1200 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60
HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60
SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
Component
Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60
HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60
HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60
SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
CompositeVideo/S-Video
Signal AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
NTSC 4 : 3 60
PAL 4 : 3 50
PAL60 4 : 3 60
SECAM 4 : 3 50
*1Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu.
Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].
*2Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu.
Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[4:3]for[ASPECTRATIO].
• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithscalingtechnology.
• Withscalingtechnology,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.
• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustments
mayberequireddependingonthetypeofcomputer.
215
9. Appendix
Specifications
Thissectionprovidestechnicalinformationaboutprojector’sperformance.
Optical
ModelName PX750U PX750UG
ProjectionSystem SingleDLP
®
chip(0.67",aspect16:10)
Resolution*
1
1920×1200pixels(WUXGA)
Lens Option(seepage217)
NP16FL
NP17ZL
NP18ZL
NP19ZL
NP20ZL
NP21ZL
PowerLensShift +0.5V,+/−0.1H(NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZL)
Lamp 400WAC(320WinECO)
LightOutput*
2
*
3
7,500lumens
ECO:80%
ContrastRatio*
3
(fullwhite:fullblack)
1000:1(2100:1withDYNAMICCONTRASTON)
ImageSize(Diagonal) 50-300"
ProjectionDistance
(Min.-Max.)
(dependingonthelens→page204)
*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.
*2 Thisisthelightoutputvalue(lumens)whenthe[PRESET]modeissetto[HIGH-BRIGHT].Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe
[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.
*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2005
Electrical
ModelName PX750U PX750UG
Inputs 2×RGB/Component(miniD-Sub15P),5×BNC,
1×HDMITypeA(HDMI
®
Connector)HDCPsupported*
4
,
1×DisplayPort(20pinconnecter)HDCPsupported*
4
,
1×S-Video(DIN4P),1×Video(BNC)
1×OptionSlot
Outputs 1×RGB(D-Sub15P)
PCControl 1×PCControlPort(D-Sub9P)
WiredRemote 1×StereominiJack
WiredLANPort 1×RJ-45(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
WirelessLANPort
(Optional)
IEEE802.11b/g/n(optionalWirelessLANUnit[NP02LMSeries]required)
USBPort 1×TypeA
ColorReproduction 10-bitsignalprocessing(1.07billioncolors)(VIEWER,NETWORK:Colors,16.7million
colors)
CompatibleSignals*
5
Analog:VGA/SVGA/XGA/XGA+/WXGA/WXGA+/SXGA/SXGA+/UXGA/WUXGA/480i/480p
/576i/576p/720p/1080i/1080p
HDMI:VGA/SVGA/XGA/WXGA/SXGA/SXGA+/UXGA/WUXGA/480p/576p/720p/1080i/108
0p(Refreshrate:60Hzonly)
VideoBandwidth RGB:165MHz(Max.)
HorizontalResolution 540TVlines:NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60
300TVlines:SECAM
ScanRate Horizontal:15kHzto108kHz(RGB:24kHzorover)
Vertical:48Hzto120Hz(HDMI:50Hzto85Hz)
SyncCompatibility SeparateSync/CompositeSync/SynconGreen
PowerRequirement/InputCurrent 100-240VAC,50/60Hz,10.8-4.3A 200-240VAC,50/60Hz,5.2A
216
9. Appendix
ModelName PX750U PX750UG
PowerCon-
sumption
ECOMODEOFF
(NORMAL)
Duallamp:1006W(100-130V)/958W(200-
240V)
Singlelamp:530W(100-130V)/515W(200-
240V)
Duallamp:958W(200-240V)
Singlelamp:515W(200-240V)
ECOMODEON Duallamp:810W(100-130V)/777W(200-
240V)
Singlelamp:439W(100-130V)/429W(200-
240V)
Duallamp:777W(200-240V)
Singlelamp:429W(200-240V)
STANDBY(NORMAL) 33W(100-130V)
34W(200-240V)
34W(200-240V)
NETWORKSTANDBY 23W(100-130V)
23W(200-240V)
23W(200-240V)
STANDBY(POWER-
SAVING)
0.2W(100-130V)
0.4W(200-240V)
0.4W(200-240V)
*4 HDMI
®
(DeepColor)/DisplayPortwithHDCP
WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology?
HDCPisanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection(HDCP)isasystem
forpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraDigitalVisualInterface(DVI).
IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIandDisplayPortinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunction-
ingproperly.WiththeimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmight
notbedisplayedduetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).
*5 Animagewithhigherorlowerresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution(1920×1200)willbedisplayedwithscalingtech-
nology.
Mechanical
ModelName PX750U PX750UG
Installation
Orientation
Desktop/Front,Desktop/Rear,Ceiling/Front,Ceiling/Rear
Dimensions 19.8"(W)×7.6"(H)×20.3"(D)/504mm(W)×192mm(H)×516mm(D)
(notincludingprotrusions)
Weight 43.4lbs/19.7kg
Environmental
Considerations
OperationalTemperatures:32°to104°F(0°to40°C),
StorageTemperatures:14°to122°F(−10°to50°C),
20%to80%humidity(non-condensing)
Regulations UL/C-ULApproved(UL60950-1,CSA60950-1)
MeetsDOCCanadaClassBrequirements
MeetsFCCClassBrequirements
MeetsAS/NZSCISPR.22ClassB
MeetsEMCDirective(EN55022,EN55024,EN61000-3-2,EN61000-3-3)
MeetsLowVoltageDirective(EN60950-1,TUVGSApproved)
Foradditionalinformationvisit:
US:http://www.necdisplay.com/
Europe:http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/
Global:http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
Forinformationonouroptionalaccessories,visitourwebsiteorseeourbrochure.
Thespecicationsaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
217
9. Appendix
Option lens
NP16FL Powerfocus
throwratio0.76:1,F1.85,f=11.6mm
ImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62m
ProjectionDistance(Min.-Max.):0.78–5.17m
NP17ZL Powerzoomandfocus
throwratio1.25-1.79:1,F1.85-2.5,f=18.7-26.5mm
ImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62m
ProjectionDistance(Min.-Max.):1.32–11.74m
NP18ZL Powerzoomandfocus
throwratio1.73-2.27:1,F1.64-1.86,f=25.7-33.7mm
ImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62m
ProjectionDistance(Min.-Max.):1.83–14.88m
NP19ZL Powerzoomandfocus
throwratio2.22-3.67:1,F1.86-2.48,f=32.91-54.23mm
ImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62m
ProjectionDistance(Min.-Max.):2.35–24.13m
NP20ZL Powerzoomandfocus
throwratio3.6-5.4:1,F1.85-2.41,f=52.8-79.1mm
ImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62m
ProjectionDistance(Min.-Max.):3.80–35.36m
NP21ZL Powerzoomandfocus
throwratio5.3-8.3:1,F1.85-2.48,f=78.5-121.9mm
ImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62m
ProjectionDistance(Min.-Max.):5.59–35.04m
• Thesespecicationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
218
9. Appendix
504 (19.8)
252 (9.9)
150 (5.9) 150 (5.9)
192 (7.6)
220 (8.7)
117.4 (4.62)
109 (4.3)150 (5.9)150 (5.9)
516 (20.3)
Cabinet Dimensions
Lens center
Lens center
Holes for ceiling mount
Unit:mm(inch)
219
9. Appendix
Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
SignalLevel
Videosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)
Syncsignal:TTLlevel
51423
10
11 12 13 14 15
6978
Pin No. RGB Signal (Analog) YCbCr Signal
1 Red Cr
2 GreenorSynconGreen Y
3 Blue Cb
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 RedGround CrGround
7 GreenGround YGround
8 BlueGround CbGround
9 NoConnection
10 SyncSignalGround
11 NoConnection
12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)
13 HorizontalSyncorComposite
Sync
14 VerticalSync
15 DataClock
220
9. Appendix
Troubleshooting
Thissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.
Indicator Messages
POWER Indicator
Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure
Off Powerisoff. –
Flashing Blue(shortashes) Preparingtoturnpoweron Waitawhile.
Blue(longashes) Offtimer(enabled)
Programtimer(offtimeenabled)
–
Orange(short
ashes)
Projectorcooling Waitawhile.
Orange(longashes) Programtimer(ontimeenabled)
Lit Blue Poweron –
Orange Standby mode (NORMAL or NETWORK
STANDBY)
–
Red Standbymode(POWER-SAVING) –
STATUS Indicator
Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure
Off Noproblem,or
standbymode
(POWER-SAVINGor
NETWORKSTAND-
BY)
–
Flashing Red(cycles
of1)
Coverproblem Thelampcoverisnotproperlymounted.Mountitproperly.(→
Page176)
Red(cycles
of4)
Fanproblem Thecoolingfanhasstoppedturning.ContactanNECprojector
customersupportcenterforrepairs.
Flashing Orange Networkconict Itisnotpossibletoconnecttheprojector’s built-inLANand
wirelessLANsimultaneouslytothesamenetwork.Toconnect
theprojector’sbuilt-inLANandwirelessLANsimultaneously,
connectthemtodifferentnetworks.
Lit Green Standbymode
(NORMAL)
–
Orange Buttonhasbeen
pressedwhile
projectorisinkeylock
mode
Theprojector’skeysarelocked.Thesettingmustbecanceled
tooperatetheprojector.(→Page119)
Projector’sIDnumber
andremotecontrol’s
IDnumberdonot
match
CheckthecontrolIDs.(→Pages119and120)
221
9. Appendix
LAMP1/LAMP2Indicator
Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure
Off Thelampisturnedoff. –
Flashing Green Preparingtorelightlampafter
lightinghasfailed
Waitawhile.
Red Lampreplacementgrace
period
Thelamp hasreachedtheendofitsservicelifeand
isnowinthereplacementgrace period(100 hours).
Replacethelampassoonaspossible.(→page174)
Red(cycles
of6)
Lampdoesnotlight Thelamphasnotturnedon.Waitatleast1minute,then
turnthepowerbackon.Ifthelampstilldoesnotlight,
contactanNECprojectorcustomersupportcenter.
Lit Red Lampusagetimeexceeded Thelamphasexceededitsusagetime.Theprojector’s
powercannotbeturnedonuntilthelampisreplaced.
(→page174)
Green Lamplit –
TEMP. Indicator
Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure
Off Noproblem
Flashing Red Temperatureproblem Thetemperatureprotectorhasbeenactivated. If the
roomtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoacool
place.IftheTEMP.indicatorstillbeashingwhenthe
projectorisusedatoperatingtemperatures,contactan
NECprojectorcustomersupportcenter.
Orange Warmingup Theusageenvironmenttemperatureislowerthanthe
projector’s operating temperature (0°C). In that case,
raisetheusageenvironmenttemperaturetoa0°Cor
higherandturnontheprojector.Iftheprojectoristurned
onataround0°C,itmaytake5minutestowarmupthe
projector.Duringthiswarm-upperiodtheTEMP.indicator
willash.Whenthewarm-upiscompleted,theTEMP.
indicatorwillgooff.
SHUTTER Indicator
Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure
Off Light –
On Green Lightshuttered –
If the temperature protector is activated
Iftheprojector’s internaltemperaturerises abnormally, the lamp turnsoffandthetemperatureindicatorashes
(repeatedlyincyclesof2).
Itmayhappenthattheprojector’stemperatureprotectorissimultaneouslyactivatedandtheprojector’spowerturns
off.
Ifthishappens,dothefollowing:
- Unplugthepowercordfromthepoweroutlet.
- Ifusinginaplacewherethesurroundingtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoadifferent,coolplace.
- Ifthereisdustintheventilationholes,clean.(→ pages 171and173)
- Waitassuchabout1hourfortheprojector’sinternaltemperaturetolower.
222
9. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions
(→“Power/Status/LampIndicator”onpage220.)
Problem CheckTheseItems
Does not turn on
or shut down
• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol
is on� (→ pages 13, 14, 17)
• Ensurethatthelampcoverisinstalledcorrectly.(→ page 176)
• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufcientventilationaroundtheprojectororiftheroom
where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location�
• Checktoseeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofits
life� If so, replace the lamp� After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used� (→ page 129)
• Thelampmayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.
• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600meters
or higher� Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH
ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down� If this happens, wait a couple
minutes and turn on the projector� (→ page 121)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for
some time and then the projector will display the image� Wait for a moment�
Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 113, 124)
No picture • Checkiftheappropriateinputisselected.(→ page 20) If there is still no picture, press the SOURCE button or one
of the input buttons again�
• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.
• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 103)
• Ensurethatthelenscoverisopen.(→ page 16)
• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevels
usingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→
page 129)
• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 42)
• IftheHDMIinputortheDisplayPortsignalcannotbedisplayed,trythefollowing.
- Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer, or use the updated driver�
For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or graphics
card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer�
Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility�
We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation�
• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon
the power to the notebook PC�
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before
being powered up�
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver
or power management software�
• Seealsothepage224�
Color tone or hue is un-
usual
• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 111)
• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 103)
Image isn’t square to the
screen
• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 21)
• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 26)
Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 24)
• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 21)
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
(→ page 204)
• Hasthelensbeenshiftedbyanamountexceedingtheguaranteedrange?(→ page 207)
• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceand
isthen
turnedon.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�
Flicker appears on
screen
• Set[FANMODE]tootherthan[HIGHALTITUDE]modewhenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500
feet/1600 meters or lower� Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters and
setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker� Switch [FAN MODE] to
[AUTO]� (→ page 121)
Image is scrolling ver-
tically, horizontally or
both
• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported
by the projector� (→ page 213)
• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 105)
223
9. Appendix
Remote control does
not work
• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 9)
• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.
• Standwithin22feet(7m)oftheprojector.(→ page 9)
• Toperformcomputermouseoperationsusingtheprojector’sremotecontrol,connecttheoptionalmousereceiver
to the computer� (→ page 35)
Indicator is lit or blink-
ing
• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LAMPIndicator.(→ page 220)
Cross color in RGB
mode
• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 28)
• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page 104)
Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.
224
9. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.
BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon
thepowertothenotebookPC.
InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbefore
beingpoweredup.
NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,
thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→ page 126 or go to next step)
• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.
DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.
WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-
ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeon
oroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethrough
externaldisplayselections.
• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer
IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimage
m
aynotbedisplayed
correctly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.Each
notebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.
Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.
• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMacintosh
WhenusingaMacintoshwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)
accordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacintoshforthechangestotakeaffect.
ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacintoshandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitch
onaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitch
tothe13"xedmodeandthenrestartyourMacintosh.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemode
andthenrestarttheMacintoshagain.
NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaPowerBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub
15-pin connector.
• MirroringonaPowerBook
* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacintoshPowerBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”
isoffonyour
PowerBook.
Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMacintoshcomputerformirroring.
• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacintoshscreen
Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApple
menuandarrangeicons.
225
9. Appendix
PC Control Codes and Cable Connection
PC Control Codes
Function Code Data
POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H
POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 2 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 3 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 03H 0BH
INPUT SELECT HDMI 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1AH 22H
INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1BH 23H
INPUT SELECT VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H
INPUT SELECT VIEWER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1FH 27H
INPUT SELECT NETWORK 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H
PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H
NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.
Cable Connection
CommunicationProtocol
Baud rate �����������������������������������������38400 bps
Data length ��������������������������������������8 bits
Parity �����������������������������������������������No parity
Stop bit ��������������������������������������������One bit
X on/off ��������������������������������������������None
Communications procedure �������������Full duplex
NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)
NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.
NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.
NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.
15243
67 98
To GNDofPC
To RxD of PC
To TxD of PC
To RTS of PC
To CTS of PC
226
9. Appendix
No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector�
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC�
Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�
• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-
naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalong
with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display
on or off.
No image (blue or black background, no display)�
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen�
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available�
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast�
Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector�
Troubleshooting Check List
Beforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsoby
referringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblem
moreefciently.
*Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.
Frequency of occurrence always sometimes(Howoften?_____________________) other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light blue) See also “Status
Indicator (STATUS)”�
Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�
Main power switch is pressed to the ON position�
Lamp cover is installed correctly�
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement�
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button
for 1 second�
Shut down during operation�
Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�
Lamp cover is installed correctly�
[AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO
POWER OFF] function)�
[OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]
function)�
Video and Audio
Image is too dark�
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast�
Image is distorted�
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�
Parts of the image are lost�
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�
Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal�
Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector�
Some pixels are lost�
Image is flickering�
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�
Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
[HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]�
Image appears blurry or out of focus�
Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution
on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�
Other
Remote control does not work�
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the
remote control�
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls�
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
the menu�
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button
for a minimum of 10 seconds�
227
9. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector
Model number:
Serial No�:
Date of purchase:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Eco Mode: OFF ON
Information on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz
Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz
Synch polarity H (+) (−)
V (+) (−)
Synch type Separate Composite
Sync on Green
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light Orange Green
Flashing light [ ] cycles
Remote control model number:
Signal cable
NECstandardorothermanufacturer’scable?
Model number: Length: inch/m
Distribution amplifier
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
Projector
PC
DVD player
Installation environment
Screen size: inch
Screen type: White matte Beads Polarization
Wide angle High contrast
Throw distance: feet/inch/m
Orientation: Ceiling mount Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Connected directly to wall outlet
Connected to power cord extender or other (the
number of connected equipment______________)
Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
Computer
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Videoequipment
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
Manufacturer:
Model number:
228
9. Appendix
TravelCare Guide
TravelCare - a service for international travelers
Thisproductiseligiblefor“TravelCare”,NEC’suniqueinternationalwarrantyandrepairservice.
FormoreinformationonTravelCareservice,visitourwebsite(inEnglishonly).
http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_support/travel_care.html
©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2011 7N951621
